Scenic (2020) - Automotive RENAULT - Free user manual and instructions

Brand	Renault
Model	Scenic (2020)
Category	Automobile / Passenger Car
Number of Seats	5 or 7 (7-seater version available)
Fuel Type	Petrol (unleaded) or Diesel
Engine Options	1.2 TCe (1197 cc), 1.3 TCe (1333 cc), 1.5 dCi (1461 cc), 1.6 dCi (1598 cc), 1.7 dCi (1749 cc)
Transmission	Manual or automatic (depending on version)
Dimensions (Height)	1.653 m (short chassis) / 1.660 m (long chassis) – unladen
Safety Systems	ABS, ESC, front/side/curtain airbags, seat belt pretensioners
Child Safety	ISOFIX anchorage points, child seat attachment via seat belt or ISOFIX
Key System	Renault card with hands-free access and remote control
Lighting	Dipped beam, main beam, fog lights, headlight beam adjustment
Comfort Features	Heated front seats, massage function, electric seat adjustment (driver)
Driver Assistance	Cruise control, speed limiter, parking sensors, rear view camera, lane departure warning
Maintenance	Service intervals indicated by onboard computer; oil change every 20,000 km or 1 year
Maximum Permissible All-Up Weight (MMAC)	Refer to vehicle identification plate (varies by version)
Towing Capacity (Braked)	Calculated as MTR - MMAC; max nose weight 75 kg
Steering	Variable power-assisted steering
Windows	Electric front and rear windows
Air Conditioning	Manual or automatic (depending on version)
Fuel Tank Capacity	Approximately 50 liters (not specified in manual)

Frequently Asked Questions - Scenic (2020) RENAULT

How do I use the Renault hands-free card to unlock the car?

With the card in the access zone (within about 1.5m of the door), place your hand on the door handle. The vehicle will unlock automatically. To lock, simply touch the sensor on the driver's door handle while the card is on you.

How do I deactivate the front passenger airbag to install a rear-facing child seat?

Insert the key into the switch located on the dashboard (passenger side) and turn it to the OFF position. The airbag warning light on the instrument panel will stay on to confirm deactivation. Remember to reactivate it when the child seat is removed.

What is the correct tire pressure for my Renault Scenic?

Tire pressures depend on load and speed. Refer to the label inside the fuel filler flap or the driver's door jamb. Typical pressures are 2.3 bar front and 2.1 bar rear for normal load.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

From the multimedia screen, select 'Settings' > 'Bluetooth'. Enable Bluetooth on your phone and search for devices. Select 'Renault' from the list and confirm the pairing code displayed on both screens.

How do I reset the service light after an oil change?

Turn the ignition on (without starting the engine). Within 10 seconds, press the trip computer reset button (on the instrument panel) for 5 seconds. The spanner symbol will flash and then go out.

What should I do if the key card battery is low?

Replace the battery with a CR2032 type. Slide the rear casing downwards while pressing on zone A, remove the old battery, and insert the new one with the positive side facing up. Test the card.

How do I change a flat tire?

Park on level ground, apply the parking brake. Remove the spare wheel from under the floor, use the jack supplied to lift the vehicle, remove the wheel bolts, replace the wheel, tighten the bolts in a star pattern, lower the vehicle, and torque the bolts to 105 Nm (consult manual).

How do I enable cruise control?

Press the ON/OFF button on the steering wheel. Accelerate to the desired speed (above 25 mph / 40 km/h), then press SET/+ or SET/- to activate. Adjust speed using +/-. Press CANCEL to suspend or OFF to turn off.

What engine oil should I use?

Use oil that meets Renault RN17 or RN0700 standard. For petrol engines: 5W-40 or 5W-30 depending on climate. For diesel engines: 5W-30 or 5W-40. Check the oil level regularly.

How do I fold the rear seats to increase cargo space?

Lower the headrests, pull the release handle on the seatback, and fold the seatback forward onto the seat cushion. For second-row seats, you may also need to slide the seat forward before folding.

USER MANUAL Scenic (2020) RENAULT

Yellow Scenic SUV driving on a city street with historic buildings and a river in the background (no visible text or symbols)

Renault SCENIC

Vehicle user manual

RENAULT

Renault recommends

Benefit from cutting-edge technology born out of competition to ensure the performance and longevity of your Renault thanks to wide range of engine lubricants developed specially by Renault and Castrol.

renault.com

Welcome to your new vehicle

This driver's handbook contains the information necessary:

• for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and the technical developments it incorporates.
• to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular maintenance.
• to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.

It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too pleased to provide you with any additional information.

To help you, you will find the following symbols:

and These appear in the vehicle and indicate that you should consult the manual for detailed information and/or limits on operations with respect to your vehicle's equipment.

anywhere in the manual indicates a hazard, danger or a safety recommendation.

The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing. This handbook covers all items of equipment (both standard and optional) available for these models but whether or not these are fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold. This handbook may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year. The diagrams in the user manual are provided as examples.

Enjoy driving your new vehicle.

Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the car manufacturer.

CONTENTS

Sections

Getting to know your vehicle ....

1

Driving

2

Your comfort ....

3

Maintenance

4

Practical advice ....

5

Technical specifications ....

6

Alphabetical index

7

Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle

Key, radio frequency remote control: general information, use 1.2

The RENAULT card: general information and use 1.6

Locking, unlocking the opening elements 1.13

Opening and closing the doors 1.16

Automatic locking when driving 1.18

Steering wheel/Power-assisted steering 1.19

Headrests - Seats 1.20

Seat belts. 1.29

Additional methods of restraint: 1.34

in addition to the front seat belts 1.34

to the rear seat belts 1.40

side protection 1.41

Child safety: General information 1.43

choosing a child seat mounting 1.46

fitting a child seat, general information.... 1.49

Child seats: attachment by seat belt or by Isofix system. 1.51

deactivating-activating the front passenger airbag. 1.63

Driving position 1.66

Instrument panel 1.70

trip computer 1.82

vehicle settings customisation menu 1.92

Clock and outdoor temperature.... 1.94

Rear view mirrors 1.95

Audible and visual signals 1.97

Exterior lighting and signals. 1.98

Headlight beam adjustment.... 1.104

Windscreen wash, wipe.... 1.106

Rear windscreen wash, wiper 1.112

Fuel tank (filling with fuel) 1.114

Reagent tank 1.117

KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (1/2)

1 Locks all the opening elements.
2 Unlocks all the opening elements.
3 Ignition and front door key.
5 Locking/unlocking the tailgate only.

Remote control with switchblade key:

4 Locking/unlocking using the switch-blade key. To release the insert from its housing, press button 4, it comes out automatically. Press button 4 and guide the insert back into its housing.

Advice

Avoid leaving the remote control in hot, cold or humid areas.

The key must not be used for any function other than those described in the handbook (removing the cap from a bottle, etc.).

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (2/2)

Radio frequency remote control operating range

This varies according to the surroundings: take care not to lock or unlock the doors by inadvertently pressing the buttons on the remote control.

Note: If a door or the boot is open or not closed properly, the doors and boot lock/unlock in quick succession.

Interference

Interference by factors in the immediate vicinity (external installations or the use of equipment operating on the same frequency as the remote control) may affect the operation of the remote control.

Replacement and additional keys or remote controls.

You must only contact an approved dealer:

• If you need to replace a key it will be necessary to take the vehicle and all of its keys to an approved Dealer in order to initialise the system.
• Depending on the vehicle, you have the option of using up to four remote controls.

Remote control unit failure

Make sure that the correct battery type is being used, and that the battery is in good condition and inserted correctly. These batteries have a service life of approximately two years.

Refer to Section 5: "Radio frequency remote control: batteries" for the battery changing procedure.

RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: use

The remote control A can be used to lock or unlock the doors and boot.

It is powered by a battery which must be replaced (refer to the information on "Radio frequency remote control: batteries" in Section 5).

Locking the doors

Press locking button 1.

The side indicator lights and hazard warning lights flash twice to indicate that the doors have been locked.

If a door or the boot is open or not properly shut, they will lock and unlock in quick succession and the hazard warning lights and side indicator lights will not flash.

Unlocking the doors

Pressing button 2 unlocks the doors and tailgate.

Unlocking is indicated by one flash of the hazard warning lights and the indicator lights.

Locking/unlocking only the boot

Press the button 3.

Note:

With the engine running, the ignition switched on (refer to the information on "Ignition switch: vehicles with a key" in Section 2), the remote control buttons will be inactive.

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: deadlocking

Two grayscale car key holders with labeled buttons, shown from different angles (no text or symbols on keys)

If the vehicle is equipped with a dead-locking function, this allows you to lock the opening elements and to prevent the doors from being unlocked using the interior handles (for example, by breaking the window and then trying to open the door from the inside).

To do this, press button 1 twice in quick succession.

The hazard warning lights and side indicator lights give two slow flashes and three quick flashes to indicate locking.

Special note: deadlocking is not possible if the hazard warning lights or the side lights are lit.

Never use deadlocking if someone is still inside the vehicle.

RENAULT CARD: general information (1/2)

1 Unlocking the doors and tailgate.
2 Locking all doors and tailgate.
3 Unlocking/locking the boot.
4 Switching on the lighting remotely.

The RENAULT card is used for:

• locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate (doors, tailgate) and the fuel filler flap (see the following pages);
• switching on the vehicle lighting remotely (refer to the following pages);
  – automatically closing the electric windows remotely (see the information on "Electric windows" in Section 3);
• starting the engine (see the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Battery life

Make sure that the correct battery type is being used, and that the battery is in good condition and inserted correctly. Its service life is approximately two years: replace it when the message "Keycard battery low" appears on the instrument panel (refer to Section 5 "RENAULT card: battery").

RENAULT card operating range

This varies according to the environment: take care not to accidentally lock or unlock the vehicle by inadvertently pressing the buttons on the RENAULT card.

Note: if a door or the tailgate is open or not closed properly, the doors and tailgate lock then unlock quickly.

Interference

Interference by factors in the immediate vicinity (external installations or the use of equipment operating on the same frequency as the RENAULT card) may disrupt its operation.

When the battery is flat, you can still lock/unlock and start your vehicle. Please see the information on "Locking and unlocking the doors" in Chapter 1 and "Starting, stopping the engine" in Chapter 2.

RENAULT CARD: general information (2/2)

Distance lighting function

Pressing button 4 switches on the dipped beam headlights and the interior lighting for approximately 20 seconds. This can be used, for example, to identify your vehicle from a distance when parked in a car park.

Note: Pressing button 4 again switches off the lighting.

Advice

Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or humid areas.

Do not keep the RENAULT card in a place where it could be bent or damaged accidentally, such as in a back pocket of a garment.

Replacement: need for an additional RENAULT Card

If you lose your RENAULT card or require another, you can obtain one from an approved dealer.

If a RENAULT card is replaced, it will be necessary to take the vehicle and all of its RENAULT cards to an approved dealer to initialise the system.

You may use up to four RENAULT cards per vehicle.

Driver's responsibility

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: usage (1/4)

There are two ways to unlock/lock the vehicle:

• the RENAULT card in "Hands-free" mode;
• the RENAULT card in remote control mode.

Do not store the RENAULT card anywhere it may come into contact with other electronic equipment (computer, phone, etc.) as this could hinder its operation.

Driver's responsibility

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your

vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

Top-down view of a car viewed from above, showing interior layout and dashboard (no text or symbols)

41601

Using the card in "hands-free" mode

In "hands-free" mode, it is possible to lock/unlock the vehicle without using any of the RENAULT card's buttons, as long as the card is within the access zone 1.

Note: "hands-free" access can be deactivated from the multimedia screen (please see the equipment instructions).

RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: usage (2/4)

"Hands-free" unlocking

With the RENAULT card in zone 1, place your hand on a door handle 2: the vehicle will unlock.

Unlocking is indicated by one flash of the hazard warning lights and the indicator lights.

Pressing the button 4 unlocks the entire vehicle and releases the boot.

Side view of a modern car with a highlighted panel showing a numbered component (no text or symbols present)

The "hands-free" system may experience temporary difficulties if one of the sensors built into the inside of the door handle is obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, gritting salt etc.). Clean the sensors. If there is still a problem, contact an approved dealer.

Remote "Hands-free" locking

With the RENAULT card on you, and doors and boot closed, move away from the vehicle: it will lock automatically as soon as you leave the access zone.

Note: the distance at which the vehicle locks depends on the surroundings.

To indicate that the vehicle has been locked, the hazard warning lights and indicator lights flash once and then light up for approximately four seconds, and a beep sounds in confirmation.

"Hands-free" locking using the sensor 3

If you wish to lock your vehicle while the card is within range, make sure that the doors and boot are closed and place your finger over the sensor 3 on the driver's door handle. The vehicle will lock.

Note: The sensor cannot be used to lock the vehicle unless the RENAULT card is within the access zone 1.

Special features of the locking system

Having locked the vehicle by pressing the sensor 3, there is a delay of approximately three seconds before it can be unlocked again. During these three seconds, the door handles can be tried to make sure that the vehicle is locked properly.

RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: usage (3/4)

Top-down view of a car with the number 5 marked on the front wheel (no text or symbols on the car itself)

39277

Particular features of the locking system (continued)

If a door is open or not properly closed:

• when locking using the sensor 3, the vehicle will lock/unlock in quick succession, but the hazard warning lights and the side indicator lights will not flash;
  – the vehicle will not lock as you move away.

If the RENAULT card has been within range for approximately 15 minutes, remote locking is disabled.

The vehicle cannot be locked if the card is within the zone 5.

If the vehicle is unlocked by pressing the button on the RENAULT card, but the doors or boot are not then opened; remote "hands-free" locking is disabled.

Using the card as a remote control

Unlocking with the card RENAULT Press button 6.

Unlocking is indicated by one flash of the hazard warning lights and the indicator lights.

Locking using the RENAULT card With the doors and boot closed, press button 7: the vehicle locks. The indicator lights and hazard warning lights flash twice to indicate that the doors have locked.

Note: The maximum distance at which the vehicle locks depends on the surroundings.

Special features

If an opening element (a door or the luggage compartment) is open or not properly closed, the vehicle cannot be locked. The vehicle will lock/unlock in quick succession, but the hazard warning lights and the side indicator lights will not flash.

The card buttons are deactivated when the engine is running.

RENAULT "HANDS-FREE" CARD: usage (4/4)

Top-down view of a car with the number 5 marked on the windshield (no text or symbols on the car itself)

41602

If, while the engine is running, a door is opened and closed, and the card is no longer in the zone 5, the message "Keycard not detected" indicates that the card is not inside the vehicle. This will, for example, prevent you from driving away after dropping off a passenger who has kept the card on them.

The warning disappears when the card is detected again.

3D model of a mobile phone with control buttons and a labeled button (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Locking/unlocking only the boot

Press the button 8 to lock/unlock the boot only.

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

RENAULT CARD: deadlocking

3D rendered image of a mobile phone's back panel with control buttons and a labeled button (no text or symbols on the device itself)

If the vehicle is equipped with a dead-locking function, this allows you to lock the opening elements and to prevent the doors from being unlocked using the interior handles (for example, by breaking the window and then trying to open the door from the inside).

To do this, press button 1 twice in quick succession.

The hazard warning lights and side indicator lights give two slow flashes and three quick flashes to indicate locking.

Special note: deadlocking is not possible if the hazard warning lights or the side lights are lit.

Never use deadlocking if someone is still inside the vehicle.

LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (1/3)

If the remote control or, depending on the vehicle, the RENAULT card does not work

In some cases, the radio frequency remote control or the RENAULT card may not work:

• RENAULT card/radio frequency remote control battery worn or run flat, vehicle battery flat, etc.
• use of appliances operating on the same frequency as the card (mobile phone, etc.);
  – vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.

It is then possible:

– depending on the vehicle, use the radio frequency remote control or the emergency key integrated in the card to unlock the front left-hand door;
- to lock each of the doors manually;
- to use the interior door locking/un-locking control (refer to the following pages).

The card's built-in key

The built-in key 2 is used to lock or unlock the front left-hand door if the RENAULT card is not working.

Access with key 2

Slide the rear casing 1 downwards while pressing on zone A.

Two transparent plastic electronic enclosures with a black component, labeled with number 39102 and numbered ② (no text or symbols on the main objects)

LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (2/3)

Using the key integrated in the RENAULT card

• Insert the tip of the key 2 into the notch 3 at the bottom of the cover B on the front left-hand door;
• Move it upwards to remove the cover B;
• Insert the key 2 into the lock and lock or unlock the front left-hand door.

Once you are inside the vehicle, put the key back in its casing in the RENAULT card.

Vehicles with key/remote control

Using the key

Insert the key 5 into the lock 4 and lock or unlock the front left-hand door.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a numbered annotation (6) and measurement marker 41606, no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Locking the doors manually

Turn screw 6 with the door open (using the end of the key) and close the door.

This means that the doors are then locked from the outside.

The doors may then only be opened from the inside or by using the key in the front left-hand door.

LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (3/3)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Interior locking/unlocking door control

Switch 7 controls the doors, the boot and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.

If a door or the tailgate is open or not closed properly, the doors and tailgate lock/unlock quickly.

If transporting an object with the tailgate open, you can still lock the doors: with the engine stopped, press and hold switch 7 for more than five seconds to lock the other doors.

Locking the opening elements without the RENAULT card or the key

For example, in the event of a discharged battery or the RENAULT card or key temporarily not working, etc.

With the engine switched off and a door or tailgate open, press and hold switch 7 for more than five seconds.

When the door is closed, all the doors and the tailgate will be locked.

Unlocking the vehicle from the outside is only possible with the RENAULT card in the vehicle's access zone or using the key.

Door and tailgate status indicator

When the ignition is on, the indicator light integrated in switch 7 informs you of the status of the doors and tailgate:

– indicator light on, the doors and tail-gate are locked;

– indicator light off, the doors and tail-gate are unlocked.

When you lock the doors from the outside, the indicator light remains lit for a moment, and then goes out.

Never leave your vehicle with the key or RENAULT card inside.

Driver's responsibility

If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving, remember that it

may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to the passenger compartment in the event of an emergency.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (1/2)

Side view of a car's front door with a labeled component (1) and number 41603, no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Opening the doors from the outside

With the doors unlocked or RENAULT card on you, hold handle 1 and pull it towards you.

As a safety precaution, the doors should only be opened or closed when the vehicle is stationary.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Opening from the inside

Pull on the handle 2.

Lights-on reminder buzzer

If you have switched off the ignition and left the lights switched on, a reminder buzzer will sound when a door is opened while the light stalk is not in position AUTO.

Door/tailgate open buzzer

At a standstill, warning light 3 lights up on the instrument panel alongside warning light 4, indicating the opening element(s) (door, boot) open or incorrectly closed.

Once the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), a warning light indicates if the door(s) or luggage compartment are open or improperly closed, along with the message "Boot open" or "Door open" and a beep will sound for around 40 seconds or until the door/luggage compartment is closed.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (2/2)

Close-up of a car door panel with a numbered component (5) and part number 41610, no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Child safety

Move lever 5 and check from the inside that the doors are securely locked, to prevent the rear doors being opened from the inside.

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING

Operating principle

After the vehicle is started, the system automatically locks the doors when you are driving at approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and over.

The door can be unlocked:

- by pressing central door unlocking switch 2.

- at a standstill, by opening a front door from inside the vehicle.

Note: if a door is opened or closed, it will automatically lock again when the vehicle reaches a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).

Activating/deactivating the function

To switch it on: with the vehicle at a standstill and the engine running, press switch 2 until a beep sounds.

To deactivate: with the vehicle stationary and the engine running, press the switch 2 until you hear two beeps.

You can also deactivate/activate the function from the menu on the multifunction screen 1 (refer to the information on the "Vehicle settings customisation menu" section 1, "Auto door locking while driving" function).

Driver's responsibility

If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving, remember that it may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to the passenger compartment in the event of an emergency.

Operating faults

If you experience an operating fault (no automatic locking, the indicator light incorporated in switch 2 does not light up when trying to lock the doors and boot, etc.), make sure that locking has not been deactivated by mistake and check that the doors and boot are properly closed. If they are correctly locked and the fault is still present, contact an authorised dealer.

STEERING WHEEL/POWER-ASSISTED STEERING

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Adjusting the steering wheel height and depth

Lower the lever 1 and position the steering wheel in the required position.

Then, raise the lever fully, beyond the point of resistance to lock the steering wheel.

Make sure that the steering wheel is correctly locked.

For safety reasons, only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary.

Power-assisted steering

Variable power-assisted steering

The variable power assisted steering system is equipped with an electronic control system which alters the level of assistance to suit the vehicle speed.

Steering is made easier during parking manoeuvres (for added comfort) while the force needed to steer increases progressively as the speed rises (for enhanced safety at high speeds).

Special feature of Stop and Start

With the engine on standby, power-assisted steering is no longer operational. In this case, it returns to its original state when the engine is restarted or when the speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h) (hill, slope etc.).

NB: power-assisted steering depends on the mode selected in the "Multi-Sense" menu (please refer to the information in "Multi-Sense" in Section 3).

Never leave the steering wheel at full lock while stationary.

With the engine switched off, or if there is a system fault, it is still possible to turn the steering wheel. The force required will be greater.

FRONT HEADRESTS

To raise the headrest

Pull the headrest upwards to the desired height.

To lower the headrest

Press button 2 and guide the headrest down to the desired height.

To adjust the angle of the headrest

Depending on the vehicle, move section A towards or away from you to the required position.

To adjust side supports B

Depending on the vehicle, sections B can be adjusted independently to the desired position.

To remove the headrest

Raise it to its highest position (tilt the seatback backwards if necessary). Press button 2 and lift the headrest to release it.

To refit the headrest

Check that the headrest rods are clean 3. Insert the headrest rods into the holes 1 (tilt the seatback backwards if necessary). Lower the headrest until it locks, press button 2 and lower the headrest as far as it will go. Check that the headrest is properly locked in place.

The headrest is an important safety component: ensure that it is in place and in the correct position. The

distance between your head and the headrest and the distance between the head and section A should be as small as possible.

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (1/3)

Settings

To move the seat forwards or back

Lift and hold the handle 1 to unlock the seat. Release the handle at the desired position and make sure that it is locked.

To raise or lower the seat base

Move the lever 2 as many times as necessary upwards or downwards until the required position is reached.

To tilt the seatback

Lift handle 3 and tilt the seatback to the desired position. Release the handle at the desired position and make sure that it is locked.

For safety reasons, make these adjustments only when the vehicle is stationary.

We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks too far to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced.

Nothing should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use.

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (2/3)

Interior view of a car seatbelt with numbered component (4) highlighted, no visible text or symbols beyond the number and label

To adjust the seat's lumbar position

Lower handle 4 to increase the support and lift it to decrease it.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a touchscreen device and a numbered component (no visible text or symbols)

Heated seats

With the ignition on:

• pressing the switch 5 on the required seat for the first time activates the heating system at maximum power. Both integrated switch warning lights come on;
• a second press decreases the heating to minimum power. One integrated warning light comes on;
• pressing for the third time turns the heating off.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.

FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (3/3)

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and door panel, with numbered annotation (7) indicating a specific component or location.

Table function

Depending on the vehicle, the passenger seatback may be folded down onto the seat base to create a table.

• Lower the headrest;
• move the seat back;
  – lower the seat base fully;
  – pull the handle 7 and fully lower the seatback.

For your safety, attach any transported objects when the seat is in the table position.

When using the passenger seat in table position, you must not use the two rear seats immediately behind it.

Be sure to hold the seat-back when placing the seat in table position.

Risk of injury.

When the front seat is in table position, the front passenger airbag airbag must be deactivated (see the in-

formation on "Child safety: activating/deactivating the front passenger airbag" in Section 1).

Risk of serious injury caused by items resting on the seatback table which may be dislodged when the airbagairbag is deployed.

The label (on the dashboard) and the markings (on the windscreen) remind you of these instructions.

Repositioning the seat

Make sure that nothing prevents the seat from moving.

It is essential to pull the handle 7 to raise the seatback. Ensure it is correctly locked in place.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.

DRIVER'S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS (1/2)

On equipped vehicles, switch 1 grants access to the seats menu on the multifunction screen (please refer to the following pages).

Adjusting the seatback

To tilt the seatback, move the top of switch 2 forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the lumbar support on the seat

Move the switch 3 forwards, backwards, up or down.

Make sure that the seat-backs are correctly locked in place.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.

Make sure that the seatbacks are correctly locked in place.

We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks too far to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced.

No object should be placed on the floor (in front of the driver). such objects may slide under the pedals during sudden braking manoeuvres and obstruct their use.

DRIVER'S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS (2/2)

Adjusting the seat position

To move the seat forwards or back Move switch 4 forwards or backwards.

To raise or lower the seat base Move the back of switch 4 up or down.

To tilt the seat base (depending on the vehicle) Move the front of switch 4 upwards or downwards.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a touchscreen device and a labeled control panel (no readable text or symbols)

Adjusting the seat length

Lift handle 5 to unlock. Release the handle at the desired position and make sure that it is locked.

Heated seats

With the ignition on:

• pressing the switch 6 on the relevant seat for the first time activates the heating system on high. Both integrated switch warning lights come on. The system automatically decides whether or not the heating is needed;
• pressing the switch for the second time changes the heating to low. One integrated warning light comes on;
• pressing for the third time turns the heating off.

Operating faults

When an operating fault is detected, the warning lights in the switch 6 for the seat concerned flash or, depending on the vehicle, switch off after approximately five seconds.

Consult an approved dealer

FRONT SEATS: Functions (1/3)

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Using the multifunction screen, depending on the vehicle you can access a number of seat functions.

On equipped vehicles, the switch 1 permits direct access to the "Seats" menu on the multifunction screen.

Please refer to the multimedia equipment instructions for further information.

Massage

You can activate the driver and front passenger seat massage function.

Using the multifunction screen, select menu "Vehicle", "Seats" then "Massage".

Browse menu "Driver" or "Passenger" to:

• select the type of massage (Tonic, Relaxing or Lumbar);
• adjust the intensity (+ or -);
• adjust the speed (+ or -);
• reset the selected settings. Press 2 then "Reset";
• activate/deactivate the massage seat (ON or OFF).

Note:

• the duration of the massage is approximately ten minutes. Then the function is disabled automatically (back in OFF position);
• the mode that you select in the "Multi-Sense" menu may affect the massage configuration (please refer to the information on "Multi-Sense" in Section 3);
• with the engine switched off, the massage function will run just once.

FRONT SEATS: Functions (2/3)

Settings

Using the multifunction screen, select menu "Vehicle", "Seats" then "Settings".

You can activate or deactivate the following elements:

• easy driver access;
• easy passenger access;
• Courtesy for passenger;
• visual feedback of current movement.

Easy driver and passenger access

Press "ON" or "OFF" to activate or deactivate this function.

When this function is activated, the seat moves backwards automatically as the driver or passenger leaves the vehicle.

The passenger seat returns to its original position when the door is closed.

The driver's seat returns to its original position when you press the start button with the door closed.

Courtesy for passenger

Press "ON" or "OFF" to activate or deactivate this function.

When this function is activated, the driver can adjust the passenger seat using switches 3, 4 and 5.

FRONT SEATS: Functions (3/3)

Position

It is possible to store the driving position of the driver seat.

The driving position includes all the electric settings for the seat base and seatback.

The driving position can be stored and recalled by pressing the buttons:

• RENAULT hands-free card detected;
• when the driver's door is opened.

Storing your driving position

• Adjust the driver seat using switches 3, 4 and 5 (refer to previous page);
• from the multifunction screen, select menu "Vehicle", "Seats", "Settings" then "Position" and select "Save".

The position of the driver is then stored.

39285

Recalling the driving position

With the vehicle at a standstill, using the multifunction screen, select menu "Vehicle", "Seats", "Settings" then "Position", select "Recall" and confirm.

Note: recall of the saved driving position is interrupted if one of the seat adjustment buttons is pressed during recall.

When driving, it is not possible to recall a driving position.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

SEAT BELTS (1/4)

Always wear your seat belt when travelling in your vehicle. You must also comply with the legislation of the particular country you are in.

Before starting, first adjust your driving position, then ask all occupants to adjust their seat belts to ensure optimum protection.

Adjusting your driving position

• Sit well back in your seat (having first removed your coat or jacket). This is essential to ensure your back is positioned correctly;
• adjust the distance between the seat and the pedals. Your seat should be as far back as possible while still allowing you to depress the clutch pedal fully. The seatback should be adjusted so that your arms are slightly bent when you hold the steering wheel;
• adjust the position of your head-rest. For maximum safety, your head must be as close as possible to the headrest;
• adjust the height of the seat. This adjustment allows you to select the seat position which offers you the best possible view;
• adjust the position of the steering wheel.

Seat belts which are incorrectly adjusted or twisted may cause injuries in the event of an accident.

Use one seat belt per person, whether child or adult.

Even pregnant women should wear a seat belt. In this case, ensure that the lap belt is not exerting too much pressure on the abdomen, but do not allow any slack.

SEAT BELTS (2/4)

Adjusting the seat belts

Sit with your back firmly against the seatback.

Shoulder strap 1 should be as close as possible to the base of the neck but not on it.

Lap belt 2 should be worn flat over the thighs and against the pelvis.

The belt should be worn so that it is as close as possible to your body, ie.: avoid wearing heavy clothing or keeping bulky objects under the belts, etc.

Locking

Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly and ensure that buckle 3 locks into catch 5 (check that it is locked by pulling on buckle 3).

If the belt jams, allow it to return slightly before attempting to unwind it again.

If your seat belt is completely jammed, pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over 3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly before attempting to unwind it again.

If there is still a problem, contact an approved dealer.

Unfastening

Press button 4 and the seat belt will be rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the belt.

SEAT BELTS (3/4)

Driver's seat belt reminder and, depending on the vehi-

cle, front passenger seat belt re- minder

It illuminates on the interior mirror or, depending on the vehicle, on the central display when the engine is started and if the driver or front passenger seat belt is not fastened (when the seat is occupied). If one of these seat belts is not fastened while the vehicle is moving at a speed over 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning flashes and an audible warning sounds during 120 seconds.

Note: an object placed on the passenger seat base may activate the warning light in some cases.

Rear seat belt reminder (depending on vehicle)

warning light illuminates on ent panel when the engine Depending on the vehicle, it companied by the 6 graphic the fastening status of each seat belts upon each:

• starting the vehicle;
• opening a door;
• fastening or unfastening of a rear seat belt.

playback of 6 graphic:

– indicator green: seatbelt fastened;
– indicator red: seatbelt unfastened;
– indicator grey: seat not occupied.

When a rear seat belt is or becomes unfastened while the vehicle is moving at a speed over 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning light flashes and an audible warning sounds for approximately 30 or 120 seconds (depending on the vehicle).

Always make sure that the rear passengers are properly fastened in and that the number of seat belts indicated corresponds to the number of rear seats occupied.

Note: an object placed on one of the front seat bases may activate the warning light in some cases.

SEAT BELTS (4/4)

Interior view of a car showing seat, dashboard, and window (no text or symbols visible)

Adjusting the height of the front seat belts

Use button 7 to adjust the seat belt height so that the shoulder strap is worn as shown previously. Press the button 7 and raise or lower the seat belt. Make sure that the seat belt is locked in position correctly after you have adjusted it.

The following information applies to the vehicle's front and rear seat belts.

- No modification may be made to the component parts of the originally fitted restraint system: belts, seats and their mountings. For special operations (e.g. fitting child seats) contact an authorised dealer.

- Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too loosely may cause injury in the event of an accident.

- Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.

- Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or child on your lap with your seat belt around them.

- The belt should never be twisted.

- Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary. Always replace your seat belts as soon as they show any signs of wear.

- Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.

- Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as they could prevent it from being properly secured.

- When the rear seats are being put back, make sure that the seat belts and buckles are correctly positioned so that they can be used properly.

- Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden away, crushed or flattened by people or objects).

REAR SEAT BELTS

Second row rear side seats

Slowly unwind belt 1.

Click the sliding buckle 2 into the corresponding red catch 3.

Rear seat functions

Refer to the information on "Rear seat functions" in Section 3.

Second row centre rear seat

Unwind belt 5 slowly from its housing 4.

Click buckle 9 into black catch 8.

Snap the last sliding buckle 6 into the red catch 7.

To store away the seat belt, guide it into housing 4 and store the two buckles into their respective housings A and B or, depending on the vehicle, hook buckle 9 on magnet C.

Third row rear seats (7-seater versions)

Slowly unwind the strap 10.

Click the buckle 11 into the corresponding black catch 12.

Check that the rear seat belts are positioned and operating correctly each time the rear seats are moved.

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (1/6)

Depending on the vehicle, they are composed of:

• seat belt inertia reel pretensioners;
• central seat belt pretensioners;
• chest-level load limiter;
• airbags - Driver and passenger front

These systems are designed to act independently or together when the vehicle is subjected to a frontal impact.

Depending on the severity of the impact, the system can trigger:

• seat belt locking;
• the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner (which engages to correct seat belt slack);
  – the lap belt pretensioners to hold the occupant in his seat;
• the front airbag.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a sphere connected to a cart with labeled parts (1 and 2), no text or symbols present.

Pretensioners

The pretensioners hold the seat belt against the body, holding the occupant more securely against the seat, thus increasing the seat belt's efficiency.

In the event of a severe frontal impact and if the ignition is switched on, the system may engage the following depending on the force of the impact:

• the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner 1 which instantly retracts the seat belt;
• the lap pretensioner 2 on the front seats.

- Have the entire restraint system checked following an accident.

- No operation whatsoever is permitted on any part of the system (pretensioners, airbags, computers, wiring) and the system components must not be reused on any other vehicle, even if identical.

• Only qualified personnel from our Network may work on the airbags; otherwise the system may trigger accidentally and cause injury.
• The electric trigger system may only be tested by a specially trained technician using special equipment.
• When the vehicle is scrapped, contact an approved dealer for disposal of the pretensioner and airbags gas generators.

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (2/6)

Load limiter

Above a certain severity of impact, this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level.

driver and passenger front Airbags

Fitted to the driver and passenger sides.

The presence of this equipment is indicated by the word "airbag" on the steering wheel, dashboard (in the area of the airbag A) and, depending on the vehicle, a label on the lower section of the windscreen.

Each airbag system consists of:

• an airbag and gas generator fitted on the steering wheel for the driver and in the dashboard for the passenger;
• an electronic unit for system monitoring which controls the gas generator electrical trigger system;
• remote sensors;
• a single warning light on the instrument panel.

Front view of a silver car with a black logo on the roof, showing dashboard and front panel (no visible text or symbols)

The airbag system uses pyrotechnic principles. This explains why, when the airbag inflates, it will generate heat, produce smoke (this does not mean that a fire is about to start) and make a banging noise. In a situation where an airbag is required, it will inflate immediately and this may cause some minor, superficial grazing to the skin or other problems.

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (3/6)

3D rendered mechanical device with wheels and a curved handle, no visible text or symbols

Operation

This system is only operational when the ignition is switched on.

In a severe frontal impact, the airbags inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact of the driver's head and chest against the steering wheel and of the front passenger against the dashboard. The air bags then deflate immediately so that the passengers are not in any way hindered from leaving the vehicle.

Operating faults

This warning light comes on the engine is started and then out after approximately three sec-

If it does not come on when the ignition is switched on or if it stays on, there is a fault in the system.

Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible.

Your protection will be reduced until this fault is rectified.

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (4/6)

Diagram of a car with a broken door and lightning bolt striking a wall, showing impact direction (no text or symbols)

The following conditions will trigger the pretensioners or airbags.

In a frontal impact against a rigid (non-deformable) surface at an impact speed equal to or greater than 16 mph (25 km/h).

In a frontal impact with another vehicle of an equivalent or higher category, with an impact area equal to or greater than 40%, where the speed of both vehicles is equal to or greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

Top-down line drawing of two cars with motion lines indicating collision or damage, no text or symbols present

In a side impact with another vehicle of an equivalent or higher category, at an impact speed equal to or greater than 31 mph (50 km/h).

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (5/6)

Three sequential illustrations of a car on a track, showing motion changes with lightning bolts (no text or symbols)

In the following examples, the pretensioners or the airbags could operate:

• impact under vehicle such as pavement;
• potholes;
• a fall or a hard landing;
• stones;
  一…

Diagram showing two car collision scenarios: top shows a broken car with lightning bolts, bottom shows a vehicle inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

In the following examples, there is a risk that pretensioners orairbags may not be triggered:

• rear impact, however severe;
  – the vehicle overturning;

• side impact to the front or rear of the vehicle;
• frontal impact, under the tail of a lorry;
• frontal impact against an obstacle with a sharp angle;
  一...

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (6/6)

All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.

Warnings concerning the driver's airbag

• Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.

• Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.

• Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.

• The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from our Network).
• Do not sit too close to the steering wheel when driving: Sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on "Adjusting your driving position" in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the air bag to deploy correctly and to be fully effective.

Warnings concerning the passenger airbag

• Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the airbag.
• Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).
• The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may be sustained. In general, parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head, etc.)
• The devices in addition to the front passenger seat belt should be reactivated as soon as a child seat is removed, to ensure the protection of the passenger in the event of an impact.

A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS THE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, I.E. THE PASSENGER AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.

(refer to the information on "Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag" in Section 1)

METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR SEAT BELTS

Force limiter

It is fitted to the rear side seats in the second row.

Above a certain severity of impact, this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level.

- Have the entire restraint system checked following an accident.

- No operation whatsoever is permitted on any part of the system (airbags, electronic units, wiring) and the system components must not be reused on any other vehicle, even if identical.

- Only qualified personnel from our Network may work on the airbags; otherwise the system may trigger accidentally and cause injury.

SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES

Side Airbags

This airbag is fitted to the front seats, activated at the sides of the seats (door side) to protect the occupants in the event of a severe side impact.

Curtain Airbags

These are airbag fitted along the sides of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger along the front and rear door side windows to protect the passengers in case of a severe side impact.

Depending on the vehicle, a marking on the windscreen informs you of the presence of additional means of restraint (airbags, pretensioners etc.) in the passenger compartment.

Warning relating to the side airbag

-Fitting seat covers: seats equipped with an airbag require covers specifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved dealer to find out if these covers are available. The use of any covers other than those signed for your vehicle (including those designed for another vehicle) may act the operation of the airbags and reduce your protection.

• In the front, do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the seatback, the door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with objects such as clothes or accessories. This may prevent the airbag from operating correctly or cause injury when the airbag is deployed.
• No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal fittings, except by qualified personnel from an approved dealer.

ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT

All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.

The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both the airbag and the seat belt are integral parts of the same protection system. It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts are not worn, the occupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries occurring when the airbag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always possible with airbags.

If the vehicle should overturn or in the event of a rear impact, however severe, the pretensioners and airbags are not always triggered. Impacts to the underside of the vehicle, e.g. from pavements, potholes or stones, can all trigger these systems.

• No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on any part of the airbag system (airbags, pretensioners, computer, wiring harness, etc.), except by qualified Network personnel.
• To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental triggering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified Network personnel may work on the airbag system.
• As a safety precaution, have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has been involved in an accident, or is stolen or broken into.
• When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand over this handbook with the vehicle.
• When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved Dealer for disposal of the gas generator(s).

CHILD SAFETY: General information (1/2)

Carrying children

Please ensure that you comply with the legislation of your country.

Children, and adults, must be correctly seated and strapped in for all journeys. The children being carried in your vehicle are your responsibility.

A child is not a miniature adult. Children are at risk of specific injuries as their muscles and bones have not yet finished growing. The seat belt alone would not provide suitable protection. Use an approved child seat and ensure you use it correctly.

To prevent the doors being opened, use the "Child safety" device (refer to the information on "Opening using the doors" in Section 1).

A collision at 30 mph (50 km/h) is the same as falling a distance of 10 metres.

Transporting a child without a restraint is the equivalent of allowing him or her to play on a fourth-floor balcony without railings.

Never travel with a child held in your arms. In the event of an accident, you will not be able to keep hold of the child, even if you yourself are wearing a seat belt.

If your vehicle has been involved in a road accident, replace the child seat and have the seat belts and ISOFIX anchorage points checked.

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or by locking the doors.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

CHILD SAFETY: General information (2/2)

Using a child seat

The level of protection offered by the child seat depends on its ability to restrain your child and on its installation. Incorrect installation compromises the protection it offers the child in the event of harsh braking or an impact.

Before purchasing a child seat, check that it complies with the regulations for the country you are in and that it can be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an approved dealer to find out which seats are recommended for your vehicle.

Before fitting a child seat, read the manual and respect its instructions. If you experience any difficulties during installation, contact the manufacturer of the equipment. Keep the instructions with the seat.

Set a good example by always fastening your seat belt and teaching your child:

– to strap themselves in correctly;
- to always get in and out of the car at the kerb, away from busy traffic.

Do not use a second-hand child seat or one without an instruction manual.

Check that there are no objects in the vicinity of the child seat which could impede its operation.

Never leave a child unattended in the vehicle.

Check that your child is always strapped in and that

the belt or safety harness used is correctly set and adjusted. Avoid wearing bulky clothing which could cause the belts to slacken.

Never let your child put their head or arms out of the window.

Check that the child is in the correct position for the entire journey, especially if asleep.

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat

Illustration of a car seatbelt with a person seated inside (no text or symbols)

Rear-facing child seats

A baby's head is, proportionally, heavier than that of an adult and its neck is very fragile. Transport the child in this position for as long as possible (until the age of 2 at the very least). It supports both the head and the neck.

Choose a bucket type seat for best side protection and change it as soon as the child's head is higher than the shell.

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seat, no text or symbols present

Forward-facing child seats

The child's head and abdomen need to be protected as a priority. A forward-facing child seat which is firmly attached to the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact to the head. Ensure your child travels in a forward-facing seat with a harness for as long as their size permits.

Choose a bucket type seat for optimum side protection.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seatbelt seat, no text or symbols present

Booster cushions

From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can travel using a booster seat, which will enable the seat belt to be adapted to suit his/her size and shape. The booster seat cushion must be fitted with guides to position the seat belt on the child's thighs rather than the stomach. It is recommended that you use a seat-back fitted with a belt strap guide which can be adjusted in terms of height to position the seat belt in the centre of the shoulder. It must never rest on the neck or on the arm.

Choose a bucket type seat for optimum side protection.

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (1/3)

There are two ways of attaching child seats: via the seat belt or using the ISOFIX system.

Attachment via the seat belt

The seat belt must be adjusted to ensure that it is effective in the event of harsh braking or an impact.

Ensure that the strap paths indicated by the child seat manufacturer are respected.

Always check that the seat belt is correctly fastened by pulling it up, then pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the child seat.

Check that the seat is correctly held by moving it from side to side and back to front: the seat should remain firmly fixed.

Check that the child seat has not been installed at an angle and that it is not resting against a window.

Do not use the child seat if it may unfasten the seat belt restraining it: the base of the seat must not rest on

the buckle and/or catch of the seat belt.

The seat belt must never be twisted or the tension relieved. Never pass the shoulder strap under the behind the back.

Check that the seat belt has not been damaged by sharp edges. If the seat belt does not operate normally, it will not protect the child Consult an approved dealer. Do not use this seat until the seat belt has been repaired.

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (2/3)

Attachment using the ISOFIX system

Approved child seats ISOFIX are standardised in accordance with current regulations if any of the four cases below applies:

• ISOFIX universal 3-point forward-facing seat;
  – ISOFIX semi-universal 2-point seat;
• Specific;

- i-Size Which has:

— either a belt which attaches to the third ring of the seat concerned;

- or a strut that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved seat i-Size, the role of which is to prevent the child seat from moving in the event of a collision.

In the latter three cases check that your child seat can be installed by consulting the list of compatible vehicles.

Attach the child seat with the ISOFIX locks, if these are provided. The ISOFIX system allows quick, easy, safe fitting.

The ISOFIX system consists of 2 rings and, in some cases, a third ring.

No modifications may be made to the component parts of the restraint system (ISOFIX seat belts, seats

and their mountings) originally fitted.

Before using an ISOFIX child seat that you purchased for another vehicle, check that its installation is

authorised. Consult the list of vehicles which can be fitted with the seat from the equipment manufacturer.

The ISOFIX anchorage points have been exclusively designed for child seats with the ISOFIX system. Never fit a different type of child seat, seat belt or other objects to these anchorage points. Check that nothing is obstructing the anchorage points.

If your vehicle has been involved in a road accident, have the ISOFIX anchorage points checked and replace your child seat.

CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (3/3)

2

3

1

Attachment using the ISOFIX system (continued)

The two rings 1 are located between the seatback and the seat base of the seat

and are identified by a symbol.

Rear side seats

The third ring 2 or 3 is used to attach the upper strap on some seats ISOFIX.

The rings are located on the rear seat-backs and indicated by the symbol.

Check that the seatback of the forward-facing child seat is in contact with the seatback of the vehicle seat. In this case, the child seat may not always rest on the seat base of the vehicle seat.

The child seat strap must be attached to the corresponding ring.

Do not use any other mounting point.

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (1/2)

Some seats are not suitable for fitting child seats. The diagram on the following page shows you how to attach a child seat.

Fit the child seat in a rear seat wherever possible.

Make sure that the child seat or the child's feet do

not prevent the front seat from locking correctly. Refer to the information on the "Front seat" in Section 1.

Check that when installing the child seat in the vehicle it is not at risk of coming loose from its base.

If you have to remove the headrest, check that it is correctly stored so that it does not come loose under harsh braking or impact.

Always attach the child seat to the vehicle even if it is not in use so that it does not come loose under harsh braking or impact.

The types of child seats indicated may not be available. Before using a different child seat, check with the manufacturer that it can be fitted.

In the front seat

The laws concerning children travelling in the front passenger seat differ in every country. Consult the legislation in force and follow the indications on the diagram on the following page.

Before fitting a child seat in this seat (if authorised):

– lower the seat belt as far as possible;
- move the seat as far back as possible;
- gently tilt the seatback away from vertical (approximately 25^ );
- on equipped vehicles, raise the seat base as far as possible.

In all situations, reinsert the headrest to its full extent so that it does not interfere with the child seat (see the information on "Front headrests" in Section 1);

After installing the child seat, when this is possible, you can move the vehicle seat forward if necessary (so as to leave enough space in the rear seats for passengers or other child seats). In the case of a rear-facing child seat, do not let it touch the dashboard or move it to the furthest forward position.

Do not change other settings after installing the child seat.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before

fitting a rear-facing child seat to this seat, check

that the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag" in Section 1).

CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (2/2)

In the rear seat

A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest the door.

Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.

For the safety of the child in the forward-facing position:

• move the relevant seat backwards as far as possible;
• move the seat in front of the child forwards, and set the position of the seatback to avoid contact between the seat and the child's legs.

Always remove the headrest from the rear seat used for the child seat (see "Rear headrests" in Section 3). If necessary, position the rear seat as far back as possible. This must be done before fitting the child seat.

Check that the child seat is resting against the back of the rear seat.

For 7-seater vehicles, the second row rear seats must be pushed forward before a child is seated in the third row rear seats.

For 7-seater vehicles, a child seat with a floor support should never be installed on the third row rear

seats.

Ensure that the child seat or the child's feet do not prevent the front seat from locking correctly. Refer to

the information on the "Front seat" in Section 1 or the "Rear seats" in Section 3.

When fitting a child seat (Group 2 or 3 booster seat), check that the seat belts operate (wind) correctly: refer

to Section 1 "Rear seat belts". If necessary, adjust the position of the vehicle seat.

The floor of your vehicle has storage spaces. Before installing a child seat with a floor support, ensure that

this seat can be correctly installed by consulting the list of compatible vehicles supplied with the child seat.

Risk of serious injury in the event of sudden braking or accident.

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (1/6) Visual installation of the five-seater version

41623

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before

installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

Using a child safety system which is not approved for this vehicle will not correctly protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Check the status of the airbag fitting a child seat or allowing a ger to use the seat.

Seat not suitable for fitting child seats.

Seat which allows a child seat universal" approval to be attached at belt.

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (2/6)

The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the applicable regulations are respected.

Five-seater version
Type of child seat	Weight of the child	Front passenger seat		Rear side seats	Rear centre seat
		Without airbag or with airbag deactivated	With airbag activated
Carrycot fitted across the vehicle Group 0	< 10 kg X X U (2)	X
Rear-facing shell seatGroups 0 or 0 +	< 10 kg and < 13 kg	U (1) (5) X U (3)	X
Shell seat/rear-facing seatGroups 0+ and 1	< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg	U (1) (5) X U (3)	X
Forward-facing seatGroup 1	9 to 18 kg X U (5)	U (3) (4)	X
Booster seatGroups 2 and 3	15 to 25 kg and 22 to 36 kg	X U (5) U (3) (4)	X

(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (3/6)

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with "Universal" approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.

(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest the door.
(3) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.
(4) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the child seat. Please refer to the information on the "Rear headrests" in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards, move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child's legs.
(5) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25^ ).

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (4/6)

The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the applicable regulations are respected.

Seven-seat version
Type of child seat W	Weight of the child	Front passenger seat		Row 2 rear side seats	Row 2 rear centre seat	3rd row rear seats (5)
		Without airbag or with airbag deactivated	With airbag activated
Carrycot fitted across the vehicle Group 0	< 10 kg X X U (2) X X
Rear-facing shell seat Groups 0 or 0 +	< 10 kg and < 13 kg U	(1) (6) X U (3) X	X
Shell seat/rear-facing seat Groups 0+ and 1	< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg	U (1) (6) X U	(3) X X
Forward-facing seat Group 1	9 to 18 kg X U (6)	U (3) (4)	X	U (7)
Booster seat Groups 2 and 3	15 to 25 kg and 22 to 36 kg	X U (6)	U (3) (4)	X U

(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (5/6)

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.

U = Seat which allows a child seat with "Universal" approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.
(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest the door.
(3) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.
(4) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the child seat. Please refer to the information on the "Rear headrests" in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards, move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child's legs.
(5) Push the seat(s) in front of the child in a third row seat as far forward as possible.
(6) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25^ ).

(7) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: a child seat with a floor support must never be fitted.

CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (6/6) Installation diagram, 7-seater version

41833

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before

installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

Using a child safety system which is not approved for this vehicle will not correctly protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

Check the status of the airbag fitting a child seat or allowing a gger to use the seat.

Seat not suitable for fitting child seats.

Seat which allows a child seat

with "Universal" approval to be attached by a seat belt.

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (1/6) Visual installation of the five-seater version

41762

Seat which does not allow a child seat to be fitted.

Using a child safety system which is not approved for this vehicle will not correctly protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before

installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

Seat which allows an ISOFIX seat to be fitted.

The rear seats are fitted with chorage point which allows a d-facing ISOFIX child seat with al approval to be attached. The age points are located on the of the rear seats.

Fit the child seat in a rear seat wherever possible.

Fitting a seat ISOFIX in the rear-left seat means the middle seat cannot be used. The central seat belt will no longer be either accessible or useable.

To install an ISOFIX seat in this seat, detach the central seat belt by hand before engaging the bolts.

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (2/6)

The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the regulations in force are respected.

Five-seater version
Type of child seat	Weight of the child	Seat size ISOFIX	Front passenger seat		Rear side seats	Rear centre seat
			Without airbag or with airbag deactivated	With airbag activated
Carrycot fitted across the vehicle Group 0	< 10 kg F, G X	X X X
Rear-facing shell seat Groups 0 or 0 +	< 10 kg and < 13 kg	E IL (1) (4)	X IL (2) X
Shell seat/rear-facing seat Groups 0+ and 1	< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg	C, D IL (1)	(4) X IL (2) X
Forward-facing seat Group 1	9 to 18 kg A, B,	B1	IUF - IL	(1)	IUF - IL (2) (3)	X
Booster seat Groups 2 and 3	15 to 25 kg and 22 to 36 kg		X	IUF - IL (1)	IUF - IL (2) (3)	X

Seat i-Size

i-U (1) (4)

X

i-U

X

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (3/6)

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved "Universal/semi-universal" or "vehicle specific" child seat to be attached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

i-U = Suitable for "universal" front-facing and rear-facing i-Size restraint devices.

(1) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25^ ).
(2) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.
(3) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the child seat. Please refer to the information on the "Rear headrests" in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards, move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child's legs.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is indicated by a letter:

• A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
• C and D: shell seat or rear-facing seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg) or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
• E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0 (less than 10kg ) or 0+ (less than 13kg );
• F and G: cots in group 0 (less than 10 kg).

(4RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY:) before installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (4/6)

The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the applicable regulations are respected.

Seven-seat version
Type of child seat	Weight of the child	Seat size ISOFIX	Front passenger seat		Row 2 rear side seats	Row 2 rear centre seat	3rd row rear seats
			Without airbag or with airbag deactivated	With airbag activated
Carrycot fitted across the vehicle Group 0	< 10 kg F, G X	X X X X
Rear-facing shell seat Groups 0 or 0 +	< 10 kg and < 13 kg	E IL (1)	(4) X IL (2) X X
Shell seat/rear-facing seat Groups 0+ and 1	< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg	C, D IL (1)	(4) X IL (2) X X
Forward-facing seat Group 1	9 to 18 kg	A, B, B1	X	IUF - IL (1)	IUF - IL (2) (3)	X	X
Booster seat Groups 2 and 3	15 to 25 kg and 22 to 36 kg		X	IUF - IL (1)	IUF - IL (2) (3)	X X

Seat i-Size

i-U (1) (4)

X

i-U

X

X

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (5/6)

X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.

IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved "Universal/semi-universal" or "vehicle specific" child seat to be attached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.

i-U = Suitable for "universal" front-facing and rear-facing i-Size restraint devices.

(1) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25^ ).
(2) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the child seat.
(3) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the child seat. Please refer to the information on the "Rear headrests" in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards, move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child's legs.

The size of the ISOFIX child seat is indicated by a letter:

– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
- C and D: shell seat or rear-facing seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg) or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
- E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0 (less than 10kg ) or 0+ (less than 13kg );
- F and G: cots in group 0 (less than 10 kg).

(4RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY:) before installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (6/6) Visual installation of seven-seater version

41763

Seat which does not allow a child seat to be fitted.

Using a child safety system which is not approved for this vehicle will not correctly protect the baby or child.

They risk serious or even fatal injury.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before

installing a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

Seat which allows an ISOFIX eat to be fitted.

The rear seats are fitted with chorage point which allows a d-facing ISOFIX child seat with al approval to be attached. The age points are located on the of the rear seats.

Fit the child seat in a rear seat wherever possible.

Fitting a seat ISOFIX in the rear-left seat means the middle seat cannot be used. The central seat belt will no longer be either accessible or useable.

To install an ISOFIX seat in this seat, detach the central seat belt by hand before engaging the bolts.

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating front passenger AIRBAG (1/3)

Deactivating the front passenger airbag

Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat:

• check that the child seat can be installed on this seat;
• it is essential to deactivate the airbag for a rear-facing child seat.

To deactivate the airbag: with the vehicle stopped and the ignition off, push and turn the lock 1 to the OFF position.

With the ignition on, it is essential to

check that the warning light is correctly lit on the display 2 or, depending on the vehicle, on the rear-view mirror 3.

This light remains permanently lit to let you know that you can fit a child seat.

The front passenger airbag must only be activated or deactivated when the vehicle is stationary with the off.

If it is interfered with when the vehicle is being driven, indicator lights

and will come on.

Switch the ignition off then on again to reset the airbag in accordance with the lock position.

DANGER

Since operation of the front passenger airbag is not compatible with the position of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER fit a rear-facing child restraint system in a seat protected by an ACTIVATED front AIRBAG. This can lead to the DEATH of the CHILD or SERIOUS INJURY.

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating front passenger AIRBAG (2/3)

DANGER

Since operation of the front passenger airbag is not compatible with the po-

sition of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER fit a rear-facing child restraint system in a seat protected by an ACTIVATED front AIRBAG. This can lead to the DEATH of the CHILD or SERIOUS INJURY.

The markings on the dashboard and labels A on each side of the passenger sun visor 4 (example: label shown above) remind you of these instructions.

CHILD SAFETY: deactivating, activating front passenger AIRBAG (3/3)

Activating the front passenger airbag

You should reactivate the airbag as soon as you remove the child seat from the front passenger seat to ensure the protection of the front passenger in the event of an impact.

To reactivate the airbag : with the vehicle stopped and the ignition off, push and turn lock 1 to the ON position. With the ignition on, it is essential to

check that the 2 warning light is off and that the 1 light is lit on the display 2 or, depending on the vehicle, on the rear-view mirror 3 for around 1 minute after each time the engine is started.

The front passenger airbag is activated.

Operating faults

It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the airbag activation/deactivation system is faulty.

Allowing any other passenger to sit in that seat is not recommended.

Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.

The front passenger airbag must only be activated or deactivated when the vehicle is stationary with the

off.

If it is interfered with when the vehicle is being driven, indicator lights

and will come on.

Switch the ignition off then on again to reset the airbag in accordance with the lock position.

DRIVER'S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)

DRIVER'S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)

The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Stalk for:

– direction indicator lights;
- exterior lights;
- rear fog lights.

4 Steering wheel with driver's Airbag location, horn.

5 Instrument panel.
6 Head-up display.
7 Controls for:

• on-board computer information read-out and vehicle settings customisation menu,
• remote radio and navigation system.

8 Steering column stalk for wind-screen and rear screen wash/wiper.
9 Heating or air conditioning controls.
10 Multifunction touch-screen.

11 Multifunction screen controls:

– screen activation/deactivation;
- volume;
- welcome menu;
– driving aids menu;
- settings.

12 Switches for:

• hazard warning lights;
  – electric door locking.

13 Passenger Airbag location.

14 glove box or storage drawer.
15 Controls for:

• front seat heating;
• activation/deactivation, depending on the vehicle, of the ECO mode;
• activation/deactivation of the parking distance control system;
• activation/deactivation of the function Stop and Start.

16 Assisted parking brake control.

17 Main switch for:

• speed limiter;
• cruise control;

– adaptive cruise control.

18 Gearstick.
19 Accessories and multimedia sockets.
20 Multi-Sense control.
21 Automatic gearbox gear display.
22 Handbrake.
23 Engine start/stop button (vehicles with RENAULT card).
24 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
25 Control for adjusting steering wheel height and reach.
26 Cruise control/speed limiter and adaptive cruise control controls.
28 Bonnet release control.
29 Controls for:

• headlight beam height remote adjustment;
  – instrument panel lighting dimmer.

DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)

DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)

The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.

1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Passenger Airbag location.
4 Controls for:

- front seat heating;

- activation/deactivation, depending on the vehicle, of the ECO mode;

- activation/deactivation of the parking distance control system;

- activation/deactivation of the function Stop and Start.

5 Heating or air conditioning controls.
6 Multifunction touch-screen.
7 Multifunction screen controls:

– screen activation/deactivation;
- volume;
- welcome menu;
– driving aids menu;
- settings.

8 Stalk:

– direction indicator lights;
- exterior lights; - rear fog lights.

9 Cruise control/speed limiter and adaptive cruise control controls.

10 Head-up display.
11 Instrument panel.
12 Steering wheel with driver's Airbag location, horn.
13 Controls for:

- on-board computer information read-out and vehicle settings customisation menu,

- remote radio and navigation system.

14 Steering column stalk for wind-screen and rear screen wash/wiper.
15 Controls for:

- headlight beam height remote adjustment;

– instrument panel lighting dimmer.

16 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
17 Control for adjusting steering wheel height and reach.
18 Engine start/stop button (vehicles with RENAULT card).

19 Switches for:

• hazard warning lights;
  – electric door locking.

20 Assisted parking brake control.

21 Main switch for:

• speed limiter;
• cruise control;
• adaptive cruise control.

22 Handbrake.
23 Accessories and multimedia sockets.
24 Multi-Sense control.
25 Gearstick.
26 glove box or storage drawer.
27 Automatic gearbox gear display.
28 Bonnet release control.

WARNING LIGHTS (1/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Instrument panel A or B: this comes on when the driver's door is opened.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and circular dial (no visible text or symbols)

In some cases, the appearance of a warning light is accompanied by a message.

Side light warning light

Main beam headlight tell-tale

Dipped beam headlight tell-tale

Rear fog lights tell-tale

Automatic main beam head-light indicator light

Please refer to the information on "External signals and lights" in Section 1.

Left-hand direction indicator tell-tale

Right-hand direction indicator tell-tale

Warning light STOP requires you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions

allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.

If no lights or sounds are apparent, this indicates a fault in the instrument panel. This indicates that it is essential

to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow). Ensure that the vehicle is correctly immobilised and contact an approved Dealer.

The warning light means you should drive very carefully to an approved dealer as soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.

WARNING LIGHTS (2/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Low fuel level warning light

It lights up orange when the ig-

nition or the engine is switched on then, depending on the vehicle, goes off after a few seconds or is displayed in white. If it comes on orange while driving and is accompanied by a beep, fill up with fuel as soon as possible. There is only approximately 30 miles (50 km) worth of fuel left.

STOP light

STOP This lights up when the ignition or engine is switched on and goes out as soon as the engine is running. It comes on with other warning lights and/or messages, and is accompanied by a beep.

It requires you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it.

Contact an approved Dealer.

Brake circuit fault warning light

It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.

If it comes on during braking and is accompanied by the STOP warning light and a beep, it indicates that the fluid level in the circuit is low or that there is a braking system fault.

Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow and consult an approved dealer.

Battery charge warning light

It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.

If it comes on on the road, accompanied by the STOP warning light and a beep, this indicates an overload or discharge in the electrical circuit.

Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow and contact an approved Dealer.

Oil pressure warning light

It lights up when the ignition or

the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.

If it comes on on the road, accompanied by the STOP warning light and a beep, stop immediately and cut the ignition.

Check the oil level. If the level is normal, the warning light is related to something else.

Call an approved Dealer.

Warning light for the electronic stability program

(ESC) and traction control system

It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.

There are several reasons for the warning light to come on: please refer to the information on "Driver correction devices and aids" in Section 2.

WARNING LIGHTS (3/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Variable power-assisted steering warning light

It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.

If it comes on while driving, alongside the warning light STOP, this means there is a system fault.

Contact an authorised dealer.

Warning light

This lights up when the ignition or engine is switched on and goes out as soon as the engine is running. It can light up in conjunction with other warning lights and/or messages on the instrument panel.

It means you should drive very carefully to an approved dealer as soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.

Toxic Fume Filter System Warning Light

On vehicles which are equipped with it, this light comes on when the engine is started and, depending on the vehicle, when the ignition is switched off if the vehicle is in the engine standby phase (refer to the information on the “Stop and Start function” in Section 2) then goes out.

• If it lights up continuously, consult your approved dealer as soon as possible;
• if it flashes, reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible.

Please refer to the information on "Maintenance and anti-pollution advice" in Section 2.

Anti-lock braking warning light

It lights up when the ignition or the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.

If it lights up when you are driving, it indicates a fault in the anti-lock braking system.

Braking will then be as normal, without the ABS. Contact an approved Dealer as soon as possible.

Coolant temperature warning light

This lights up red when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.

If it turns red, stop and let the engine idle for a minute or two.

The temperature should drop. Otherwise, stop the engine. Let the engine cool down before checking the coolant.

Contact an approved Dealer.

WARNING LIGHTS (4/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Preheating warning light (diesel version)

This should come on when the ignition is switched on. It indicates that the heater plugs are in operation.

It goes out when preheating is complete. The engine can be started.

Door status warning light

Gear change indicators

This lights up to advise you to change to a higher gear (up arrow) or lower gear (down arrow).

Depending on the vehicle, the most suitable gear is displayed on the instrument panel.

Please refer to the information on "Driving advice, Eco-driving" in Section 2.

Indicator lightAirbag

It lights up when the ignition or

the engine is switched on and goes off after a few seconds.

If it does not come on when the ignition is switched on, or comes on when the engine is running, there is a fault in the system.

Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible.

Brake pedal warning light

This lights up when the brake

pedal should be depressed. Refer to the information on the "Automatic gearbox" in Section 2.

Please refer to the information on "Driving advice, Eco-driving" in Section 2.

Handbrake "on" and electronic parking brake warn-

ing light

Refer to the information on the "Handbrake" and "Electronic parking brake" in Section 2.

Engine standby warning light

Please see information in the paragraph on "Stop and Start Function" in Section 2.

Unavailability of engine standby warning light

Please see information in the paragraph on "Stop and Start Function" in Section 2.

Speed limiter warning lights

Refer to the information on the "Speed limiter" in Section 2.

Cruise control warning lights

Refer to the information on "Cruise control" in Section 2.

Adaptive cruise control warning light

Refer to the information on "Adaptive cruise control" in Section 2.

Assisted parking brake fault light

Please refer to the information on the "Assisted parking brake" in Section 2.

WARNING LIGHTS (5/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Refer to the information on the "Tyre pressure monitoring system" in Section 2.

Lane departure system warning light

Please refer to the information on "Lane departure warning" in Section 2.

Emergency active brake assist

Refer to the information on "Active emergency braking" in Section 2.

Particle filter system warning light (petrol version)

Refer to the "Special features of petrol versions" in Section 2.

ECO mode warning light

This comes on when ECO activated.

Please refer to the information on "Driving advice, Eco-driving" in Section 2.

Free wheel warning light in mode ECO

It lights up in mode ECO when the "Free wheel in mode ECO" is activated (ON) in the user settings.

The warning light colour is dim when the vehicle is not while freewheeling. This warning light is bright when the vehicle is while freewheeling (automatic neutral).

Please refer to the information on "Driving advice, ECO-driving" in Section 2.

Warning light for reagent level and faults in the ex-as reduction system

Refer to the information on "Reagent tank" in Section 1.

WARNING LIGHTS (6/6)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

On display C or, depending on the vehicle, on the rear-view mirror D

Passenger Airbag ON

Refer to the information on "Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag" in Section 1.

Passenger Airbag OFF

2 Refer to the information on "Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag" in Section 1).

Driver's seat belt reminder and, depending on the vehi-

cle, front passenger seat belt re- minder.

Please see the information on "Seat belts" in Section 1.

Rear seat belt reminder (depending on vehicle)

Please see the information on "Seat belts" in Section 1.

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (1/6)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Instrument panel A

lights up when the driver's door is opened. In some cases, the appearance of a warning light is accompanied by a message.

You can customise your instrument panel with the content and colours of your choice.

For vehicles fitted with a navigation system, refer to the handbook for the equipment.

For vehicles not fitted with a navigation system, refer to the information on "Vehicle settings customisation menu" in Section 1.

Rev counter 1
(graduations x 1000)

Speedometer 2

This is displayed differently according to how the instrument panel is customised.

Overspeed buzzer

Depending on the vehicle and country, a buzzer sounds for approximately 10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long as the vehicle is travelling in excess of 72 mph (120 km/h).

Driving style indicator 3

Please refer to the information on "ECO-driving" in Section 2.

Trip computer and warning system

Refer to the information on the "Trip computer and warning system" in Section 1.

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (2/6)

Coolant temperature indicator 4

Fuel gauge 5

If the level is at the minimum, warn-

ing light integrated in the indicator comes on orange, accompanied by a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (3/6)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Instrument panel B

lights up when the driver's door is opened. In some cases, the appearance of a warning light is accompanied by a message.

Rev counter 6 (graduations x 1000)

Speedometer 7

This is displayed differently according to how the instrument panel is customised.

Overspeed buzzer

Depending on the vehicle and country, a buzzer sounds for approximately 10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long as the vehicle is travelling in excess of 72 mph (120 km/h).

Driving style indicator 8

Please refer to the information on "ECO-driving" in Section 2.

Trip computer and warning system

Refer to the information on the "Trip computer and warning system" in Section 1.

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (4/6)

Coolant temperature indicator 9

In normal use, the indicator 9 should be before the red zone 10. Under "intensive" operating conditions, the needle may approach this zone. This is not serious unless the warning light STOP comes on accompanied by a message on the instrument panel and a beep.

Fuel gauge 11

If the level is at the minimum, warning light integrated in the indicator comes on orange, accompanied by a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.

Engine oil level low warning

When the engine is started, the instrument panel display alerts you when the minimum oil level is reached. Refer to the information on the "Engine oil level" in Section 4.

The first time the warning appears, it can be cleared by pressing switch 12 "OK". Subsequent warnings will disappear automatically after around 30 seconds.

Instrument panel in miles

(option to switch to km/h)

Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system

• With the ignition off, press the OK button 12 and the engine start/stop button 14;
• using control 13, select "Settings", "Instrument panel", then the unit;
• Press the OK button 12 to confirm.

To return to the previous mode, repeat the same operation.

Vehicles fitted with a navigation system

On the multifunction screen, select "System", "User profile" and "Unit".

Note: In both cases, once the battery is switched off, the on-board computer automatically returns to the original unit of measurement.

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (5/6)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Head-up display 15

The display details driving and navigation information from the instrument panel and the multifunction screen.

If fitted to the vehicle, this comes on when the engine is started and is retracted when the engine is switched off.

Do not manually force the opening/closure of the head-up display.

You can adjust certain settings from the multifunction screen: with the engine running, access menu "System", "Display" then "Head-up display".

Adjusting the display information height

Depending on your driving position, you can raise or lower the information on the display.

Adjusting the display brightness

You can adjust the brightness (day or night mode).

- Automatically: the brightness will vary depending on the outdoor light.

- manually: the brightness automatically switches with the activation/deactivation of the lights.

In both cases, the day mode varies based on the outdoor brightness.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

Good information visibility can be affected by:

– the seat position;
– the presence of an object placed on the opened display;
– the polarisation of some spectacle lenses;
– extreme weather conditions (rain, snow, very strong sunlight, etc.).

In the event of contradictory information between the instrument panel and the head-up display/multi-

function screen, please refer to the information displayed on the instrument panel.

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (6/6)

Operating faults

In the event of a malfunction (the display fails to open when the engine is started, or the display retracts, with the engine running, following an object impacting the display):

- stop and restart the engine;

or

- from the multifunction screen, change the display opening settings.

If there is still a problem, contact an authorised dealer.

With the display opened or closed, no object should be placed on it or in its housing.

Do not use solvents, detergents or an abrasive cloth to clean the display.

Only use a microfibre wipe.

TRIP COMPUTER: general information (1/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Trip computer and warning system 1 or 3

Depending on the vehicle, this includes the following functions:

• distance travelled;
• journey parameters;
• information messages;
• operating fault messages (associated with the warning light);
• warning messages (associated with the STOP warning light);

All these functions are described on the following pages.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Display selection keys 2

Scroll through the following information by repeated short presses on button 2 (the display depends on the vehicle equipment and country):

a) total mileage and trip mileage recorder;
b) journey parameters:
– average fuel consumption;
– current fuel consumption;
- Estimated range with remaining fuel;
- distance travelled;
- average speed;

c) current speed;

d) distance before service;

e) reset the tyre pressure;

f) trip log, operating faults and information message readout;

g) Estimated range with remaining reagent.

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information (2/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Trip mileage resetting

With "trip mileage recorder" selected on the display, press key OK 4 until the mileage recorder resets to zero.

Resetting the journey parameters (reset button)

with the display showing one of the trip settings, press key OK 4 until the display is reset to zero.

Interpreting some of the values displayed after resetting

The values showing average fuel consumption and average speed will become more stable and reliable the further you have travelled since the last time the Reset button was pressed.

The average fuel consumption may decrease when:

– the vehicle stops accelerating;
- the engine reaches its operating temperature (if the engine was cold when the reset key was pressed);
- when driving from an urban area onto the open road.

Automatic resetting of the journey parameters

Resetting occurs automatically when the maximum value of any of the parameters is exceeded.

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (1/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
	a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.
	b) Journey parameters:Average fuel consumption.The value is displayed after having travelled at least 400 metres since the last reset.
	Current fuel consumption.Value displayed after reaching a speed, depending on the vehicle, from 6.2 mph (10 km/h) to 18.6 mph (30 km/h).

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (2/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
Range 541 km	b) Journey parameters (continued): Estimated range with remaining fuel.The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
Distance[IMAGE] 522 km	Distance travelled since last reset.
Average[IMAGE] 123.4 km/h	Average speed since the last reset.The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
55.8 mph (90 km/h)	c) Current speed.

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (3/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections			Interpreting the display selected
On-board computer with mileage-before-service message
			d) Mileage before service or oil change.Mileage before serviceWith the ignition switched on, the engine not running and the display set to “SERVICE INTERVALS”, press and hold the OK button for approximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before service (distance or time to the next service). When the distance value approaches its limit, there are several possible scenarios:– range less than 930 miles (1,500 km) or one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed accompanied by the nearest term (distance or time);– range equal to 0 miles (0 km) or date of service reached: the message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by the warning light 📄.The vehicle requires a service as soon as possible.
SERVICE INTERVALS		Service in 30 000 km / 12 mo
		Service due in 300 km / 24 days
		Service required
Reset: to reset the distance before the next service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows the mileage before service permanently.Note: If a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.

TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (4/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections			Interpreting the display selected
On-board computer with distance before next service message (cntd.)
			d) Mileage before service or oil change.Mileage before serviceWith the ignition on, the engine not running and the display selected “SERVICE INTERVALS“, press button OK for about 5 seconds to display the mileage before the next service, then press the button 2 to view the mileage before the next oil change (distance or time remaining before the next service). When the distance value approaches its limit, there are several possible scenarios:- range less than 930 miles (1,500 km) or one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed accompanied by the nearest term (distance or time);- range equal to 0 miles (0 km) or date of oil change reached: the message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by the warning light. The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.
SERVICE INTERVALS		Oil change in 30 000 km / 24 mo
		Service due in 300 km / 24 days
		Service required
Depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low speed, door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idling speed, towing a trailer, etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change can therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.Resetting: to reset the mileage before a service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows the range permanently.NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.

ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (5/5)

The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.

Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
2.5 2.52.5 + Tyre pressureNo message memorised	e) Reset the tyre pressure. Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure monitoring system” in Section 2.f) Trip log. Successive display:– information messages (passenger airbag OFF etc.);– operating fault messages (Check injection system, etc.).
Top Up AdBlue before 2400 km	g) Estimated range with remaining reagent. Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in Section 1.

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages

These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status. Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
“Parking brake on” Indicates that the parking brake has been applied.
“Checking control functions”	Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.
“Turn steering wheel + START”	Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock the steering column.
“Steering wheel not locked”	Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: operating fault messages

These appear with the warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an authorised dealer as soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.

They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The warning light stays on. Examples of operating fault messages are given in the following pages.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
“Clean diesel filter”	Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter; contact an approved Dealer as soon as possible.
“Check lighting” Indicates a fault in the headlights.
“Check vehicle”	Indicates a fault in one of the pedal sensors, battery management system or oil level sensor.
“Check airbag”	Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.
“Check anti-pollution system” – Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s particle filter system.
	– Indicates a fault in the emissions reduction system when it is accompanied by the warning light. Refer to the information on “Reagent tank” in Section 1.

TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message

These appear with the STOP warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.

Some examples of warning messages are given below. Note: the messages appear on the display either individually or alternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.

Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
“Engine failure hazard”	Indicates an injection fault, the vehicle's engine has overheated or there is a serious engine fault.
“Power steering fault” Indicates a fault in the steering system.
“Braking system fault” or “Stop vehicle”	Indicates a fault in the braking system. Apply the electronic parking brake manually and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.
“Electric failure DANGER”	Indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).
“Puncture” Indicates a puncture on the tyre displayed on the instrument panel.

VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (1/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and digital display (no visible text or symbols)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this function allows you to activate/deactivate and adjust some of the vehicle's functions.

Vehicles fitted with a navigation system

Accessing the settings menu

With the vehicle at a standstill, using the multimedia screen 1, select "Vehicle", "User settings" to access the various settings.

Adjusting the settings

Select the function to modify:

a) Free wheel in ECO mode
(please refer to the information on "Driving advice, ECO-driving" in Section 2;
b) Auto door lock while driving;
c) Use handsfree card: open/close;
d) Indicator sound volume;
e) Internal welcome sound;
f) External welcome;
g) Automatic Cabin Light;
h) Rear wiper when rear gear engaged;
i) Driving style indicator.

Depending on the function, select "ON" or "OFF" to activate or disable it and "+" or "-" to adjust the volume of the indicators.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (2/2)

Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system

Accessing the settings menu on display 2

With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch 3 OK to access the settings menu.

Adjusting the settings

Browse using the control 4 to select the function to adjust:

a) Free wheel in ECO mode
(please refer to the information on "Driving advice, ECO-driving" in Section 2;
b) Auto door lock while driving;
c) Unlock driver door only;
d) Rear wiper when rear gear engaged;
e) Front park assist;
f) Automaticmain beam lights;
g) Lane departure warning : VOLUME;
h) Lane departure warning : Sensitivity;
i) Rear park assist;
j) PARKING ASSIST VOLUME;
k) LANGUAGE;
I) Units;
m) Style;
n) COLOUR.

function activated

function deactivated

Once a line has been selected, press the switch 3 OK to adjust the function.

If you select either "PARKING ASSIST VOLUME" or "LANGUAGE", you will have to make a further selection (sound volume of the parking distance control or instrument panel language). In this case, make your selection and confirm it by holding the switch 3 OK – the

selected value is shown by a front of the line.

To exit the menu, press the control 4 upwards or downwards. It may be necessary to carry out this operation several times.

For further explanations of the Free wheel function in ECO mode, refer to the information on "Driving Advice, ECO-driving" in section 2.

The vehicle settings personalisation menu cannot be used when driving. At speed exceeding 12 mph (20 km/h), the instrumental panel display switches automatically back to trip computer and warning system mode.

CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

The time and/or external temperature are displayed on the multifunction screen 1

Refer to the handbook for the equipment.

External temperature indicator

Special note:

When the exterior temperature is -3 °C to +3 °C, the °C characters flash (signalling a risk of ice on the road).

External temperature indicator

As ice formation is related to climatic exposure, local air humidity and temperature, the external temperature alone is not sufficient to detect ice.

If the electrical supply is cut (battery disconnected, broken supply wire, etc.), the clock will automatically go back to the right time after a few minutes once the system is capable of receiving information GPS.

REAR VIEW MIRRORS (1/2)

Exterior rear view mirrors

Adjustment

Select the door mirror using switch 2, then use button 1 to adjust it to the desired position.

Heated door mirrors

Mirror de-icing is carried out at the same time as rear screen de-icing.

Please refer to the information on "Manual air conditioning" and "Automatic climate control".

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.

Folding rear view mirrors

The door mirrors automatically fold in when the vehicle is locked (switch 3 in position B).

In any case, you can make the door mirrors fold in (switch 3 in position C) or fold out (switch 3 in position A).

Automatic mode is then deactivated. To reactivate it, position switch 3 to B.

Welcome and goodbye function (depending on the vehicle)

- From the multifunction screen, select the "Vehicle" menu, then "User settings", "External welcome" and activate or deactivate the function (ON or OFF);

or

- press and hold the 4 OK switch to access the settings menu. Then browse using control 5 to select the "External welcome" menu.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Depending on the selected choice, the door mirrors will fold out:

• when the ignition is next switched on (function deactivated);
• upon detecting the RENAULT card or upon unlocking the vehicle (function activated).

Objects observed in the door mirror glass are actually closer than they appear.

For your safety, take this into account in order to correctly assess the distance before any manoeuvre.

REAR VIEW MIRRORS (2/2)

Special feature:

When the rear-view mirror has been manually deployed or folded back, it is possible to reset it to a usage position. To do this, position the switch 3 to C. A mechanical noise from the rear-view mirror unit will be heard.

If it is not the case, place switch 3 to A and then place switch 3 to C until the mechanical noise of the rear-view mirror is heard.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the frontview mirror and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Interior rear view mirror

Rear view mirror with lever 6

When driving at night, to avoid being dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle behind, depress the little lever located behind rear view mirror 6.

Rear view mirror without lever 6

The rear-view mirror automatically darkens when you are being followed by a vehicle using main beam headlights or in very bright lighting.

Depending on the vehicle, information regarding the activation and deactivation of the front passenger airbag is displayed on the interior rear-view mirror (please refer to information on "Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation/activation" in Section 1).

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Horn

Press the steering wheel boss A to activate the horn.

Headlight flasher

Pull stalk 1 towards you then release it to flash the headlights.

Direction indicators

Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering wheel and in the direction you are going to turn it.

One-touch mode

When driving, it is possible that the steering wheel may not be turned sufficiently to return the stalk automatically to its starting position.

In this case, briefly turn stalk 1 to the intermediate position, then release it: the stalk returns to its original point and the indicator light flashes three times.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a digital control panel and numbered component (no visible text or symbols)

Hazard warning lights

Press switch 2. This switch activates all four direction indicators and the side indicator lights simultaneously. It must only be used in an emergency to warn drivers of other vehicles that you have had to stop in an area where stopping is prohibited or unexpected or that you are obliged to drive under special conditions.

Depending on the vehicle, the hazard warning lights may come on automatically under heavy deceleration. You can switch them off by pressing switch 2.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (1/6)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Side lights

Turn ring 3 until the symbol is opposite mark 2. This indicator light on the instrument panel comes on.

Main beam headlights

With the dipped beam headlights lit, push stalk 1. This indicator light on the instrument panel comes on.

To return to the dipped headlight position, pull the stalk 1 towards you again.

Before driving at night: check that the electrical equipment is operating correctly and adjust your headlights. Refer to the information on "Adjusting the headlight beams" in section 1. As a general precaution, check that the lights are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow or objects

being transported).

Dipped beam headlights

Manual operation

Turn ring 3 until the symbol is opposite mark 2. This indicator light on the instrument panel comes on.

Automatic operation

Turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is opposite mark 2: with the engine running, the dipped beam headlights switch on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the light outside, without any action on stalk 1.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (2/6)

Automatic main beam headlights

Depending on the vehicle, this system switches the main beam headlights on and off automatically. It uses a camera located behind the interior rear-view mirror to detect vehicles that are being followed and those coming in the opposite direction.

The main beam headlights come on automatically if:

• exterior light is weak;
• no other vehicles or lighting are detected;
• the vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

If any of the above conditions are not fulfilled, the system switches to dipped beam headlights.

The "automatic main beam headlights" system should under no circumstances be used to replace driver atten-

tion and responsibility with regard to vehicle lighting and adapting to light, visibility and traffic conditions.

The system may encounter difficulties under certain conditions, including:

• extreme weather conditions (rain, snow, fog, etc.);
• obstruction in front of the wind-screen or camera;
• when a following or oncoming vehicle has weak or hidden lighting;
• incorrect settings for the front headlights;
• reflective systems;
  一 ...

Interior view of a car dashboard with a digital display and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Switching on

Vehicle fitted with a navigation system

From the multimedia screen, 4, select the "Vehicle" menu, "Driving assistance", "Automaticmain beam lights", then choose "ON" or "OFF".

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (3/6)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Vehicles without a navigation system

• With the vehicle stationary, press and hold the OK switch 5 to access the settings menu;

• repeatedly press the control 6 up or down until you reach the "Driving assistance" menu. Press the OK switch 5;

• repeatedly press control 6 up or down until you reach the "Automaticmain beam lights" menu, then press the OK switch 5;

• press the OK switch 5 again to activate or deactivate the function.

Activation/deactivation

To activate automatic main beam headlights:

• turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is opposite mark 2;
• push stalk 1.

Warning light A comes on the instrument panel.

To deactivate automatic main beam headlights:

• pull stalk 1 towards you;
• or turn ring 3 to a position other than AUTO.

Warning light ☐ goes out on the instrument panel.

Note: make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

Each time you start the engine, pull and then push the stalk 1 to reactivate the system.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (4/6)

Automatic main beam headlights (continued)

Operating faults

When the message "Check auto lighting" appears on the instrument panel, the system is deactivated. Consult an approved dealer.

Using the portable navigation system at night in the windscreen area below the camera may disturb the op-

eration of the “automatic main beam headlights” system (risk of reflection on the windscreen).

Daytime running lights function

The daytime running lights come on automatically with no action on stalk 1 when the engine is started, and they go off once the engine is switched off.

Operating faults

When the message "Check lighting" with warning light is displayed

and warning light 📄 flashes on the instrument panel, this indicates that there is a lighting fault.

Consult an approved dealer.

Switching off the lights

There are two possibilities:

• manually, move ring 3 to position 0;
  – automatically, the lights will go out when the engine is switched off, the driver's door is opened or the vehicle is locked. In this case, the next time the engine is started the lights will be switched back on according to the position of the ring 3.

Lights-on reminder buzzer

A warning beep sounds when the driver's door is opened to warn you that the lights are still on.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (5/6)

"See-me-home lighting" function

This function allows you to briefly switch on the dipped beam headlights (to provide light when opening a gate, etc.).

With the engine and lights switched off and the ring 3 in position 0 or AUTO, pull the stalk 1 towards you: the dipped beam headlights come on for approximately 30 seconds. To increase this duration, you may pull the stalk up to four times (total time restricted to approximately two minutes). The message "Follow-me home for ____" along with the time the lights will be on for is displayed on the instrument panel to confirm this action. You can then lock your vehicle.

To switch off the lights before they go out automatically, turn ring 3 to any position, then return it to the AUTO position.

Welcome and goodbye function

(depending on the vehicle)

Once the function is activated, the daytime running lights and the rear side light light up automatically upon detecting the RENAULT card or when the vehicle is unlocked.

They switch off automatically:

• approximately one minute after lighting up;
• when starting the engine based on the position of the lighting stalk;
  or
  – upon locking the vehicle.

Welcome lighting under the door mirrors

With the function activated, the lights located under the door mirrors come on automatically upon detection of the RENAULT card, upon unlocking the vehicle or when opening a door.

They switch off automatically:

• approximately one minute after lighting up;
  – upon starting the engine;
  or
  – upon locking the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating the function

From the multimedia screen, select "Vehicle", "User settings", "External welcome". Choose "ON" or "OFF" to activate or deactivate the function.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (6/6)

Front fog lights

Turn centre ring 7 on stalk 1 until the symbol faces mark 2, then release it.

Operation of the fog lights depends on the exterior lighting position selected, and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel.

Rear fog lights

Turn centre ring 7 on the stalk until the symbol faces mark 2, then release it.

Operation of the fog lights depends on the exterior lighting selected, and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel.

Do not forget to switch off the fog lights when they are no longer needed, to avoid inconveniencing other road users.

When driving in fog or snow, or when transporting objects which are higher than the roof, the headlights do not come on automatically.

Switching on the fog lights remains the responsibility of the driver: the indicator lights on the instrument panel inform you whether the fog lights are lit (indicator light on) or not (indicator light not on).

Switching off the lights

Turn the ring 7 again until the mark 2 is opposite the symbol for the fog light that you wish to switch off. The corresponding indicator light on the instrument panel goes out.

The fog lights switch off when the exterior lights are switched off.

Cornering lights

(depending on vehicle)

Whenever the dipped beam headlights are on and under certain conditions (at speed, the steering wheel at an angle, in forward gear, the indicator lights on, etc.), when taking a corner one of the front fog lights will come on to light the inside of the bend.

HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT (1/2)

On vehicles fitted with this function, control A allows you to adjust the height of the beams according to the load.

Turn control A downwards to lower the headlights and upwards to raise them.

For vehicles not fitted with a control A, the headlight adjustment is automatic, depending on the vehicle load.

Halogen bulb versions

For manual settingsExamples of positions for adjusting control A according to the load
	5-seater version(Short chassis)	5-seater version(Long chassis)	7-seaterversion
Driver alone or with frontpassenger	0	0	0
Driver with one frontpassenger, passengers atthe rear in the third row	-	-	1
All seats occupied 1 1 or 2 2
Driver with passengers andluggage (or load) reachingthe maximum permissibleall-up weight	3	3	3
Driver without passengersand luggage (or load)reaching the maximumpermissible all-up weight	3 or 4 4 4

The table below gives some examples. In all cases, adjust control A according to the vehicle load so that the road can be seen and other drivers are not dazzled.

HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT (2/2)

LED versions

For manual settingsExamples of positions for adjusting control A according to the load
	5-seater version (Short chassis)	5-seater version (Long chassis)	7-seater version
Driver alone or with front passenger	0	0	0
Driver with one front passenger, passengers at the rear in the third row	-	-	1
All seats occupied 1 or 2 1 or 2 2
Driver with passengers and luggage (or load) reaching the maximum permissible all-up weight	2 or 3 3 3
Driver without passengers and luggage (or load) reaching the maximum permissible all-up weight	3 or 4 4 4

The table below gives some examples. In all cases, adjust control A according to the vehicle load so that the road can be seen and other drivers are not dazzled.

WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (1/6)

Vehicle fitted with intermittent windscreen wipers

A single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep of the wipers.
B stop
C intermittent wiping
The wipers will pause for several seconds between sweeps. It is possible to change the time between sweeps by turning ring 2.
D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping

Special note

When driving the vehicle, the wiping speed slows down whenever the vehicle stops. For example, fast wiping speed will slow to normal wiping speed. As soon as the vehicle moves off, wiping will return to the speed originally selected.

If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and cancels the automatic function.

Positions A, C and D are accessible with the ignition on. Position E is accessible only when the engine is running.

Efficiency of a wiper blade

Check the condition of the wiper blades. How long they last depends on you:

• it must remain clean: clean the blade and the screen regularly with soapy water;
• do not use it when the screen is dry;
• free it from the screen when it has not been used for a long time.

In any event, replace them as soon as they begin to lose efficiency: approximately every year (refer to the information on "Wiper blades: replacement" in section 5).

Precautions for using the wipers

• In freezing or snowy weather, clear the screen before starting the wipers (risk of motor overheating);
• ensure that no objects are obstructing the travel of the blade.

WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (2/6)

Vehicle fitted with front windscreen wiper rain sensor

The rain sensor is located on the windscreen, in front of the interior rear-view mirror.

A single sweep

A short push will trigger one sweep of the wipers.

B stop

C automatic wiper function

When this position is selected, the system detects water on the wind-screen and triggers the wipers at a suitable wiping speed. It is possible to change the triggering threshold and the time sweeps by turning ring 2:

• F : minimum sensitivity
• G : maximum sensitivity

The higher the sensitivity, the quicker the wipers will react and the faster the wipe.

When activating automatic wiping or when increasing sensitivity, one sweep of the blades is performed.

Note:

• the rain sensor is only intended as a driving aid. In the event of reduced visibility, the driver should manually activate the wipers. In foggy weather or during snowfalls, wiping is not automatically triggered and remains under the driver's control;
• in the event of temperatures below zero, automatic wiping is not activated when the vehicle is started. It is automatically activated as soon as the vehicle exceeds a certain speed (approximately 5 mph (8 km/h));
• do not activate automatic wiping in dry weather;
• fully de-ice the windscreen before activating automatic wiping.

WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (3/6)

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction of the automatic wiping, the wiper is set to intermittent wiping. Contact an authorised dealer.

The operation of the rain sensor can be disturbed in the event of:

• damaged windscreen wiper blades; a film of water or traces left by a blade in the sensor's detection zone may increase the response time of the automatic wiper, or increase the wiping frequency;
• a windscreen with any chip or crack level with the sensor, or a windscreen covered in dust, dirt, insects, ice, the use of washing wax and water-repellent chemicals; the windscreen wiper will be less sensitive or may even not react at all.

D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping

Positions A and D are accessible with the ignition on. Positions C and E are accessible only with the engine running.

Special note

When driving the vehicle, the wiping speed slows down whenever the vehicle stops. For example, fast wiping speed will slow to normal wiping speed. As soon as the vehicle moves off, wiping will return to the speed originally selected.

If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and cancels the automatic function.

Precautions

• In the event of ice, check whether the blades are stuck to the windscreen before operating the wiping mechanism. If you activate the wipers while the blades are stuck down with ice, you may risk damaging both the blade and the wiper motor.
• Do not activate the wipers on a dry screen. This will lead to premature wear or damage to the blades.

WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (4/6)

Specific front wiper position (service position)

This position enables the blades to be lifted to remove them from the windscreen.

This can be useful:

• to clean the blades;
• to release the blades from the windscreen in winter;
• replace the blades (refer to the "Wiper blades: replacement" paragraph in Section 5).

With the ignition on and the engine off, lower the windscreen wiper stalk to position E (fast continuous wipe). The wiper arms stop in a position away from the bonnet.

To return the blades to position, make sure they have been placed on the windscreen, then move the stalk to position B (stop) with the ignition on.

Before switching on the ignition, place the wipers on the windscreen. Otherwise, there may a risk of damage to the bonnet or the wipers when they are switched on.

Note:

Once the wipers have been switched off, at least 1 minute after locking the vehicle, it is possible to manually move the blades. Do not force the blade arms to move. This may risk damage to the wiper motor, the arms and the blades.

After your intervention, to reposition the blades correctly, make sure the blades are resting on the windscreen, switch on the ignition and activate the wiper control.

The blade on the driver's side must always be above the passenger blade. If this is not the case, a quick sweep of the windscreen wipers should be performed once the vehicle is travelling at over 4 mph (7 km/h).

In the event of obstacles on the windscreen (dirt, snow, ice, etc.), clean the windscreen (including the central area located behind the interior rear view mirror) and the rear screen before starting the wipers (risk of motor overheating).

If an object is preventing a blade from moving, it may stop functioning. Remove the obstacle and reactivate the wiper using the wiper stalk.

Before any action involving the windscreen (washing the vehicle, de-icing, cleaning the windscreen,

etc.) return stalk 1 to position B (stop).

Risk of injury and/or damage.

WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (5/6)

Windscreen washer

With the ignition on, pull stalk 1 then release.

A brief pull will trigger a single sweep of the wipers, in addition to the wind-screen washer.

A longer pull will trigger three sweeps of the wipers followed, a few seconds later, by a fourth, in addition to the windscreen washer.

Note:

In temperatures below zero, the washer liquid risks freezing to the windscreen, thereby reducing visibility. Heat the windscreen using the demister control before cleaning.

When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in position B (stop).

Risk of injury.

WINDSCREEN WASH, WIPE (6/6)

Headlight washers

Headlights on

On vehicles fitted with this, with the engine running, hold stalk 1 pulled towards you for about 2 seconds: the headlight washers and windscreen washers will be activated at the same time.

The headlight washers are also activated after three prolonged movements on the front windscreen washer control.

Note:

To ensure the headlight washers operate correctly in winter, remove snow from the jet trims and de-ice the jet trims using an aerosol de-icer.

You are recommended to regularly remove dirt encrusted on the headlight glass.

When the windscreen washer fluid level reaches minimum:

- the message "Windscreen wash fluid shortage" is displayed on the instrument panel;

– the headlight washer system may be deprived.

Fill the windscreen washer fluid and then activate the windscreen washer, with the engine running, to reprime the system.

When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in position B (stop).

Risk of injury.

REAR SCREEN WASH, WIPE (1/2)

Rear screen wiper

With the ignition on, turn ring 3

on stalk 1 to align the symbol with mark 2.

• stop;
• intermittent wiping.

The wipers will pause for several seconds between sweeps. Wiping frequency varies with vehicle speed;

- slow continuous wiping.

To stop operation, twist the ring 3 again to the off position.

NB: when washing using a roller type car wash, return the ring 3 on the stalk 1 to the stop position to deactivate automatic wiping.

Follow usage recommendations.

Do not use the wiper arm to open or close the tailgate.

Before any action involving the rear screen (washing the vehicle, de-icing, cleaning, etc.) return stalk 1 to

the stop position.

Risk of injury and/or damage.

Efficiency of a wiper blade

Check the condition of the wiper blades. How long they last depends on you:

• it must remain clean: clean the blade and the screen regularly with soapy water;
• do not use it when the screen is dry;
  – free it from the screen when it has not been used for a long time.

In any event, replace them as soon as they begin to lose efficiency: approximately every year (refer to the information on "Wiper blades: replacement" in section 5).

Precautions for using the wipers

• In freezing or snowy weather, clear the screen before starting the wipers (risk of motor overheating);
• ensure that no objects are obstructing the travel of the blade.

REAR SCREEN WASH, WIPE (2/2)

Activation/deactivation of the rear screen wiper

Engaging reverse gear triggers intermittent wiping (if the front wipers are in operation). If your vehicle is fitted with a vehicle settings customisation menu, you can opt to activate or deactivate this function. To do this, refer to the information on the "Vehicle settings customisation menu" in Section 1; "Rear wiping in reverse gear".

For vehicles not fitted with a settings customisation menu, you can have this function deactivated by an authorised dealer.

In the event of obstacles present on the rear window (dirt, snow, etc.), the wiper will try to sweep away all the obstacles. If an obstacle prevents the blade from moving, it can be stopped. Remove the obstacle, wait for around 30 seconds and reactivate the wiper using the wiper stalk.

Precautions

• In the event of ice, check that the blades are not stuck to the wind-screen before operating the wipers. If you activate the wiper while the blade is blocked by ice, you risk damaging both the blade and the wiping motor.
• Do not operate the wipers on a dry screen. This will lead to the premature wear or damage to the blades.

39142

Rear screen wash/wipe

With the ignition on, push and

hold stalk 1, then release.

A longer action will trigger three sweeps of the wipers followed, a few seconds later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind-screen washer.

FUEL TANK (1/3)

Useable tank capacity:

• about 11 gal (50 litres) for short chassis versions;
• about 11.6 gal (53 litres) for long chassis versions.

With the vehicle unlocked, to open cover 1, press area A then release. The cover 1 opens.

Valve 2 is integrated into the filler pipe. For details on filling the fuel tank, refer to the information on "Filling with fuel".

To close it, press on the fuel filler flap by hand, as far as it will go.

Fuel grade

Use a high-grade fuel that complies with the legislation in force in each country and which must comply with the specifications given on the label on the cover 1. Please refer to the information on "Engine specifications" in Section 6.

Never press valve 2 with your fingers.

Do not wash the filler area with a high-pressure

washer.

Diesel versions

Only use diesel fuel which complies with the information on the label located inside the cover 1.

Petrol versions

It is essential to use unleaded petrol. The octane rating (RON) must comply with the information given on the label on the cover 1. Refer to the information on "Engine specifications" in Section 6.

Do not mix even small amounts of petrol (unleaded or E85) with diesel.

Do not use ethanol-based

fuel if your vehicle is not compatible with this fuel.

Do not add anything to the fuel (additive, reagent, etc.) to prevent the risk of damaging the engine.

FUEL TANK (2/3)

Filling with fuel

With the ignition off, insert the nozzle to open valve 2 and insert it fully before turning it on to fill the fuel tank (risk of splashing).

Keep the nozzle in this position throughout the entire filling operation.

When the pump cuts out automatically at the end of the filling procedure, a maximum of two further filling attempts may be made, as there must be sufficient space in the fuel tank to allow for expansion.

Make sure that no water enters the fuel tank during filling. The valve 2 and its surround must remain clean.

Petrol versions

Using leaded petrol will damage the antipollution system and may lead to a loss of warranty.

To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler neck consists of a restrictor fitted with a safety system which only allows a nozzle for unleaded petrol to be used (at the pump).

Vehicle fitted with the Stop and Start function

To fill up with fuel, the engine must be stopped (and not on standby): stop the engine (Please See "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Fuel types that conform to European standards with which the engines of vehicles sold in Europe are compatible: refer to the “Engine specifications” in section 6.

Do not mix even small amounts of petrol (unleaded or E85) with diesel.

Do not use ethanol-based

fuel if your vehicle is not compatible with this fuel.

Do not add anything to the fuel (additive, reagent, etc.) to prevent the risk of damaging the engine.

FUEL TANK (3/3)

Running out of fuel on diesel versions

Vehicles with key/remote control

• Put the ignition key in "On" position M (please see the information on the "Ignition switch" in Section 2) and wait for a few minutes before starting, to enable the fuel circuit to be primed;
• turn the key to position D. If the engine does not start, repeat the procedure.
• If the engine does not start after several attempts, please contact an authorised dealer.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Vehicles with RENAULT card

With the card RENAULT in the passenger compartment, press the start button 3 without pressing any of the pedals. Wait a few minutes before starting. This will enable the fuel circuit to be primed. If the engine does not start, repeat the procedure.

If the engine does not start after several attempts, please contact an authorised dealer.

No modifications whatsoever are permitted on any part of the fuel supply system (electronic units,

wiring, fuel circuit, injectors, protective covers, etc.) as this may be dangerous (unless undertaken by qualified Network personnel).

Persistent smell of fuel

If you notice a persistent smell of fuel you should:

• stop the vehicle as soon as traffic conditions allow and switch off the ignition;
• switch on the hazard warning lights and ask your passengers to leave the vehicle and to keep away from traffic;
• contact an authorised dealer.

REAGENT TANK (1/4)

Please ensure that you comply with the legislation of your country.

It is important to remember that failure to respect regulations in force could lead to legal action being taken against the vehicle owner.

Operating principle

The reagent is intended for diesel engines fitted with the SCR (selective catalytic reduction) system.

Using a reagent reduces the quantity of nitrogen oxides in exhaust gases.

Reagent consumption in real time depends on vehicle usage conditions, the equipment fitted, and driving style.

Reagent quality

Use only reagents which conform to standard ISO 22241 and in accordance with the mark on the tank filler cap.

Filling

Useable tank capacity:

• about 3.5 gal (16 litres) for short chassis versions;
• about 3.7 gal (17 litres) for long chassis versions.

With the ignition switched off, open the cover A, then unscrew the cap 1.

Note: Ammonium hydroxide vapour may escape from the cap opening when the tank temperature is high.

Vehicle fitted with the Stop and Start function

To fill up with reagent, the engine must be stopped (and not on standby): stop the engine (please see "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

If the "XXX MILES (XXX KM) Failure Top up AdBlue" warning message appears, fill the reagent tank and

Risk of immobilisation of the vehicle.

Filler cap: this is specific.

If you have to replace it, make sure it is identical to the original cap. Contact an approved Dealer. Do not wash the filler area with a high pressure washer.

REAGENT TANK (2/4)

Precautions for use

The tank can be filled at the pump. In other cases, it is essential to read the information shown on the reagent container (e.g. the can or bottle).

When filling, handle the reagent carefully. They can damage clothes, shoes, bodywork components etc.

If the reagent overflows, or contaminates any paintwork, clean the affected area quickly with plenty of cold water and a soft cloth.

Note: If the reagent crystallises, use a soft sponge.

The reagent must not come into contact with eyes or skin. If it does, wash the affected area with plenty of water. If necessary, consult a

In extreme cold weather conditions

In frosty weather conditions, the reagent tank should be refilled when the

indicator and the message "Top Blue before 1200 km" appear on instrument panel.

Special cases

The reagent fluid freezes below about -10^ C.

In these conditions, do not attempt filling when the fluid is frozen. In the event of needing to top up or fill the tank

with reagent (on), park the vehicle in a hotter location if possible so that the reagent becomes liquid again. Otherwise, have a qualified professional top up or fill up with reagent fluid.

After filling the reagent tank, check that the cap and cover are closed, start the engine and WAIT 10 seconds with the vehicle stationary, engine running before setting off again.

If this operation is not carried out, the filling of the tank will not be taken into account automatically until after several dozens of minutes of driving.

The message “--- Top up AdBlue” and/or the warning lights will continue to appear until the filling has been registered by the system.

No work whatsoever is permitted on any part of the system. To prevent damage, only qualified per-

sonnel from our network may work on the system.

REAGENT TANK (3/4)

Maintenance/Range

The information displayed on the instrument panel may be accompanied by a beep.

Indicator lights	Message What to do?
- “AdBlue	Level Correct” -
- “Top Up	AdBlue before 2400 km”	When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched on, you have less than 1,488 miles (2,400 km) range.Fill or have an Approved Dealer fill or top up the reagent in the tank.
comes on.	“Top up AdBlue before 1200 km”	When the message is displayed when the ignition is switched on, you have between 744 miles (1,200 km) and 496 miles (800 km) range.Fill or have an Approved Dealer fill or top up the reagent in the tank.
comes on.	“XXX MILES (XXX KM) Failure Top up AdBlue”	The message is displayed when the ignition is switched on and is repeated:- Approximately every 62 miles (100 km), you have between about 496 miles (800 km) and 124 miles (200 km) range;- Approximately every 31 miles (50 km), you have less than 124 miles (200 km) range.In any event, fill or have an Approved Dealer fill the reagent tank as soon as possible.
flashes.	“0 MILES (0 KM) Failure Top up AdBlue”	The engine will not start.To restart, you must fill the reagent tank yourself.

REAGENT TANK (4/4)

System fault

When the indicator lights light up, this may be accompanied by a beep.

Indicator lights Message Readings
and come on.	“Check anti-pollution system”	Indicates a fault in the system. Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.
and come on.	“XXX MILES (XXX KM) Failure antipollution”	Indicates a system fault and that in less than 496 miles (800 km) it will become impossible to restart the vehicle.These warnings are repeated:– Every 62 miles (100 km) until there is around 124 miles (200 km) left before the vehicle cannot be restarted;– Every 31 miles (50 km) when there is less than 124 miles (200 km) left before the vehicle cannot be restarted.Contact your approved dealer as soon as possible.
and come on.	“0 KM Failure antipollution”	Indicates that after the ignition is switched off the vehicle will not restart. Call an approved Dealer.

Section 2: Driving

(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)

Running in 2.2

Ignition switch 2.3

Starting, stopping the engine.... 2.4

Stop and Start function 2.8

Special features of petrol versions 2.12

Special features of diesel versions 2.14

Gear lever/Handbrake 2.15

Electronic parking brake 2.16

Driving advice, ECO-driving 2.20

Maintenance and antipollution advice 2.26

Environment 2.27

Tyre pressure monitoring system 2.28

Driver correction devices and aids 2.31

Active emergency braking 2.36

Lane departure warning.... 2.43

Lane Keeping Assist 2.47

Blind spot warning 2.51

Safe distance alert. 2.55

Fatigue detection warning 2.58

Speeding alert 2.60

Speed limiter/cruise control 2.63

Adaptive cruise control 2.70

Parking distance control 2.78

Reversing camera 2.83

Assisted parking 2.85

Automatic gearbox. 2.89

2.1

RUNNING IN

Petrol version

Up to 600 miles (1000 km), do not exceed 78 mph (130 km/h) in top gear or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm.

You may only expect top performance from your vehicle after approximately 1,800 miles (3 000 km).

Service interval: refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle.

Diesel version

For the first 930 miles (1,500 km), do not exceed 81 mph (130 km/h) in the highest gear, or 2,500 rpm. After completing this mileage you may drive faster, however, it is only after approximately 3720 miles (6,000 km) that you may reasonably expect full performance.

During the running in period, do not accelerate hard while the engine is still cold and do not let the engine over-rev.

Service interval: refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle.

IGNITION SWITCH: vehicle with key

Interior view of a car dashboard with a digital display and a rotary dial (no visible text or symbols)

Ignition switch

Off position LOCK 0 (steering lock applied)

To lock: remove the key and turn the steering wheel until the steering column locks.

To unlock: turn the key and the steering wheel slightly.

"Ignition" position ON 2

The ignition is switched on: Any accessories (radio etc.) can be used.

"Start" position START 3

If the engine fails to start at the first attempt, the key must be turned back before the starter can be activated again. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.

Note: on diesel versions, several seconds may pass between turning the key and the engine starting to allow for engine preheating.

STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and digital dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Starting the engine

Petrol versions

• Activate the starter without accelerating;
• release the key as soon as the engine starts.

Never start your vehicle while freewheeling on a gradient. Risk of non-activation of power-assisted

steering.

There is a risk of accidents.

""

Diesel versions

• Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position 2 and hold this position until the engine preheating light goes off;
• turn the key to the start position "START" 3 without pressing the accelerator;
• release the key as soon as the engine starts.

Special note: if starting the engine when the outdoor temperature is very low (below - 10 °C): hold down the clutch pedal until the engine starts.

Stopping the engine

With the engine idling, turn the key to the "LOCK" position 0.

Never switch off the ignition before the vehicle has stopped completely. Once the engine has stopped, the

brake servo, power-assisted steering, etc., and the passive safety devices such as the airbags and pretensioners will no longer operate.

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (1/3)

Top-down view of a car viewed from above, showing the front wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

The RENAULT card must be inserted in detection zone 1.

To start:

• vehicles with an automatic gearbox, place the lever in position P, depress the brake pedal and press button 2;
• vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the brake or clutch pedal and press the button 2. If a gear is engaged, the vehicle may only be started by depressing the clutch pedal.

41602

Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment system (no visible text or symbols)

Special features

• If one of starting conditions is not applied, the message "Press brake + START" or "Press clutch + START" or "Select P" is displayed on the instrument panel;
• in some cases, it will be necessary to move the steering wheel whilst pressing the start button 2 to help unlock the steering column; the message "Turn steering wheel + START" will warn you of this;

"Hands-free" starting with the tailgate open

In this case, the RENAULT card should not be located in the boot, to avoid any risk of loss.

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (2/3)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Accessories function

(switching on the ignition)

Once you have gained access to your vehicle, you may use some of its functions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).

To use the other functions, with the RENAULT card in the passenger compartment, press button 2 without pressing the pedals.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, dashboard panel, and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Operating faults

In certain cases, the RENAULT "hands-free" card may not work:

• when the RENAULT card battery is drained, etc.;
• near to appliances operating on the same frequency as the card (monitor, mobile phone, video game, etc.);
  – vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.

The message "Place card close START and push" appears on the instrument panel.

Depress the brake or clutch pedal, then place the RENAULT 3 card (logo side) in contact with the start button 2 for around 2 seconds. Press the 2 button to start the vehicle. The message goes out.

STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (3/3)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Conditions for stopping the engine

The vehicle must be stationary, with the lever positioned in P for vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

With the RENAULT card in the vehicle, press the 2 button: the engine will stop. The steering column is locked when the driver's door is opened or the vehicle is locked.

If the RENAULT card is no longer in the passenger compartment when you try to switch the engine off, the message "No keycard Press and hold" appears on the instrument panel: press button 2 for longer than two seconds. If the card is no longer in the passenger compartment, make sure you can retrieve it before pressing and holding the button. Without the RENAULT, card, you will not be able to start.

With the engine switched off, any accessories being used (radio, etc.) will continue to function for approximately 10 minutes.

When the driver's door is opened, the accessories stop working.

Never switch off the ignition before the vehicle has stopped completely. Once the engine has stopped, the

brake servo, power-assisted steering, etc., and the passive safety devices such as the airbags and pretensioners will no longer operate.

When you leave your vehicle, especially if you have your RENAULT card with you, check that the engine letely switched off.

Driver's responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle

Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for a short time.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors, for example.

Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.

RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.

FUNCTION STOP AND START (1/4)

This system enables a reduced fuel consumption and lower greenhouse gas emissions.

The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. While driving, the system stops the engine (standby) when the vehicle is at a standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc).

Conditions for engine standby

The vehicle has set off from where it was parked;

For automatic gearboxes:

– the gearbox is in position D, M or N; and
– the brake pedal is depressed (sufficiently hard);

and

• the accelerator pedal is not depressed;
  and
• the speed is zero for around 1 second.

The engine remains on standby if position P is selected, or if position N is selected with the handbrake engaged and the brake pedal released.

For manual gearboxes:

– the gearbox is in neutral; and
– the clutch pedal is released. If the

warning light A flashes, this means that the clutch pedal is not sufficiently released;

- the vehicle speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

For all vehicles:

The warning light (A) on the instrument panel is lit when the engine is on standby. The vehicle equipment remains operational while the engine is stopped.

When the engine switches to standby, the steering assistance may no longer be operational.

In this case it becomes operational again when the engine is no longer on standby or the speed exceeds approximately 0.62 mph (1 km/h) (downhill, slope etc.).

Before leaving the vehicle, the engine must be stopped and not put on standby (please see the information

on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Keep your vehicle stationary when the engine is on standby (shown by the

warning light (A) on the instrument panel).

If the engine is put in standby, the electronic parking brake (depending on the vehicle) is not aptomatically.

FUNCTION STOP AND START (2/4)

Preventing the engine from standing by

In certain situations, such as negotiating a crossroads for instance, it is possible (with the system activated) to keep the engine running so as to be ready to move off quickly.

For vehicles equipped with automatic gearboxes:

Keep the vehicle stationary without pressing too hard on the brake pedal.

For vehicles equipped with manual gearboxes:

Keep the clutch pedal pressed right down.

If the engine stalls while the system is in operation, pressing the clutch pedal right down will start it again.

Conditions for coming out of engine standby

For automatic gearboxes:

• the brake pedal is released, position D or M engaged;
  or
  – the brake pedal is released in gear position N with the handbrake off;
  or
• the brake pedal is pressed again in gear position P or N engaged with the handbrake applied;
  or
  – the vehicle is in gear position R;
  or
  – the accelerator pedal is depressed;
  or
• in manual mode, the gear lever is moved to + or -.

For manual gearboxes:

• the gearbox is in neutral and the clutch pedal is slightly depressed;
  or
• the engine is in gear and the clutch pedal is pressed right down.

Special note: depending on the vehicle, if you switch off the ignition when the engine is on standby, the warning

light is displayed for a few seconds on the instrument panel.

For vehicles equipped with a manual gearbox

The restart may be interrupted if the clutch pedal is released too quickly while a gear is engaged.

To fill up with fuel, the engine must be stopped (and not on standby): switch the ignition off (please see the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

FUNCTION STOP AND START (3/4)

Conditions preventing the standby of the engine

Certain conditions prevent the system from using the engine standby function, including when:

for vehicles equipped with a RENAULT card:

• the driver's door is not closed;
• the driver's seatbelt is not fastened.

for all vehicles:

– reverse gear is engaged;
– the bonnet is not locked;
– the outdoor temperature is too low or too high;
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
- the difference between the vehicle interior temperature and the automatic climate control instruction is too high;
- parking distance control is in operation;
– the altitude is too high;

• the gradient is too steep for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox;
• the "Clear View" function is activated (please see "Automatic climate control" in Section 3);
  – the engine temperature is too low;
  – the emission control system is being regenerated;
• ...

Warning light is displayed on the instrument panel. This notifies you that engine standby is not available.

Deactivate the Stop and Start function for any operation performed in the engine compartment.

Special case for vehicles with a RENAULT card

With the engine on standby (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc.), if the driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the driver's door, or gets out of the seat, the ignition is switched off.

The assisted parking brake is applied automatically.

To restart and reactivate the Stop and Start system, start the engine (please refer to the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Special case of vehicles with a key

With the engine on standby (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc.), if you get out of the vehicle, a beep warns you that the engine is on standby and has not been stopped.

FUNCTION STOP AND START (4/4)

Special feature of the automatic engine re-start

Under certain conditions, the engine can restart on its own in order to guarantee your safety and comfort.

This can occur especially when:

– the outdoor temperature is too low or too high;
- the "Clear View" function is activated (please see "Automatic climate control" in Section 3);
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
- the vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h) (downhill slope, etc.);
– repeated pressing on the brake pedal or braking system requirement;

- ...

Deactivating, activating the function

Press 1 to deactivate the function. The message "Stop & Start deactivated" will appear on the instrument panel and the integrated warning light 2 on the switch will light up.

Pressing again will reactivate the system. The message "Stop & Start activated" will appear on the instrument panel and the integrated warning light 2 on switch 1 will go out.

Special note: with the engine on standby, press switch 1 to automatically restart the engine.

The system is automatically reactivated each time the vehicle is started (see "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Operating faults

When the message "Check Stop & Start" appears on the instrument panel and the integrated warning light 2 lights up on the switch 1, the system is deactivated.

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Special feature of vehicles with a key: for some of these conditions, the automatic restarting of the engine is inhibited if a front door is open.

Before leaving the vehicle, the engine must be stopped and not put on standby (please see the information

on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS (1/2)

The following operating conditions:

– driving for long periods when the low fuel level warning light is lit;
– using leaded petrol;
– using lubricant or fuel additives which are not approved.

Or operating faults such as:

• faulty ignition system, running out of fuel or disconnected spark plugs resulting in the engine misfiring or cutting out when driving;
• loss of power,

as they may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and thus reduce its efficiency, or damage it irreparably and cause heat damage to the vehicle.

If you notice any of the above operating faults, have the necessary repairs carried out as soon as possible by an approved Dealer.

These faults may be avoided by regularly taking your vehicle to an approved Dealer at the intervals specified in the Maintenance document.

Starting problems

To avoid damaging the catalytic converter, do not keep trying to start the engine (using the start button, or by pushing or towing the vehicle) without having identified and corrected the starting fault.

If the fault cannot be identified, do not keep trying to start the engine, but contact an approved Dealer.

Do not park the vehicle or run the engine in locations where combustible substances or materials such

as grass or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system.

SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS (2/2)/PARTICLE FILTER

Particle filter

The particle filter is used in the treatment of exhaust gases from petrol engines.

Depending on the vehicle, the warning

light displayed on the instrument panel indicates that the filter is becoming clogged and requires cleaning. To

clean it, when the warning light appears, and as traffic conditions and speed limits allow, drive at between about 31 mph (50 km/h) and 68 mph (110 km/h) until the light goes out.

After between approximately 5 and 20 minutes, the warning light should go out.

Note: The indicator light may go out after 20 minutes when the driving conditions needed to clean the filter are not completely met.

If the vehicle is stopped before the warning light disappears you will have to restart the process from the beginning.

If the filter becomes saturated, the warning light and, depending

on the vehicle, the warning light will appear on the instrument panel, accompanied by the message "Check injection". In this case, please consult an Authorised Dealer.

If the STOP warning light and, depend-

ing on the vehicle, the warning light appears, accompanied by the "Engine failure hazard" message, stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and contact an Approved Dealer.

Warning light STOP requires you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions

allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.

SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS

Diesel engine speed

Diesel engines are fitted with injection equipment which prevents the engine speed being exceeded irrespective of the gear selected.

If the message "Check anti- pollution system" is displayed along with warn-

ing lights and , consult an authorised dealer immediately.

When driving, depending on the fuel grade used, it is possible that white smoke may be emitted.

This is due to the exhaust particle filter being cleaned automatically, and does not affect the way the vehicle runs.

Running out of fuel

If the tank has been completely drained, the system must be reprimed after the tank is refilled: See "Fuel tank" in section 1 before restarting the engine.

Engine smoke opacity label

You will find 1 information on the A label stuck inside the engine compartment.

1 Diesel exhaust emissions.

Precautions to be taken in winter

To avoid any faults in icy weather:

– ensure that the battery is always fully charged,
– always keep the diesel tank relatively full to avoid water vapour condensing in it and accumulating at the bottom of the tank.

Do not park the vehicle or run the engine in locations where combustible substances or materials such as or leaves can come into with the hot exhaust system.

Gear lever

Selecting reverse gear

Vehicles with a manual gearbox: follow the grid pictured on the knob 1 and lift the ring against the gear lever knob to select reverse.

Vehicles with automatic gear-box: refer to the information on the "Automatic gearbox" in Section 2.

The reversing lights will come on as soon as reverse gear is selected with the ignition on.

Note: depending on the vehicle, if the dipped beam headlights are on, the front fog lights come on simultaneously when reverse gear is selected.

Handbrake

To release

Pull the lever 3 up slightly, press button 2 and then lower the lever to the floor.

The warning light (P) on the instrument panel will go out.

The red warning light on the instrument panel will come on if you are driving with an incorrectly released handbrake.

An impact to the under-side of the vehicle while manoeuvring (e.g. striking a post, raised kerb or street furniture) may result in the to the vehicle (e.g. defor- of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.

To apply:

Pull lever 3 upwards. Check that the vehicle is immobilised. The warning

light (P) on the instrument panel will come on.

Make sure that the hand-brake is properly released when driving (red indicator light off), otherwise over-

, or even damage, may

When stationary, and depending on the slope and/or vehicle load, it may be necessary to pull up the hand-

brake at least two extra notches and engage a gear ( 1^st or reverse gear) for vehicles with a manual gearbox or position P for vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (1/4)

Assisted operation

Applying the electronic parking brake

With the vehicle stationary, the electronic parking brake can be used to immobilise the vehicle:

- by pressing the engine start/stop button 1 or by turning the ignition key 2 (to the "ON" position 2);

or

- when the driver's seat belt is unfastened;

or

- when the driver's door is opened;

or

- for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, when position P is engaged.

In all other circumstances, for example, stalled engine or engine switched to standby by the Stop and Start function (refer to the information on the "Stop and Start function" in Section 2), the electronic parking brake is not applied automatically. Manual mode must be used.

For certain country-specific model versions, the assisted brake application function is not activated. Refer to the information on "Manual operation".

To confirm that the electronic parking brake is applied, the message "Parking

brake on" is displayed, the (P) warning light appears on the instrument panel and the 4 warning light appears on the 3 switch.

After the engine is switched off, indicator light 4 goes out several minutes after the assisted parking brake has

been applied and indicator light (P) goes out when the vehicle is locked.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that the electronic parking brake is fully

applied. Warning light 4 on switch 3 and warning light (P) on the instrument panel illuminate to show that the parking brake is applied but off when the doors are locked.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (2/4)

Assisted operation (continued)

Note: in some situations (electronic parking brake failure, manual release of the parking brake, etc.), a beep sounds and the message "Apply parking brake" appears on the instrument panel to warn you that the electronic parking brake has been released.

• with the engine running: when the driver's door is opened;
• with the engine switched off (e.g. when the engine stalls): when a front door is opened.

In this case, pull and release switch 3 to apply the assisted parking brake.

Assisted release of the parking brake

The brake will be released as soon as the vehicle starts and accelerates.

Manual operation

You can apply the electronic parking brake manually.

Manually applying the electronic parking brake

Pull switch 3. Warning light 4 and warning light (P) on the instrument panel light up.

Manually releasing the electronic parking brake

Press switch 1 without pressing the pedals or turning the key 2 to position "ON" 2 to switch on the ignition. Press the brake pedal then press switch 3: indicator light 4 on the switch and indica-

tor light (P) displayed on the instrument panel go out.

Brief stop

To apply the electronic parking brake manually (when stopping at a red light, or stopping when the engine is running, etc.): pull and release the switch 3. The brake is released as soon as the vehicle is started up again.

Before leaving the vehicle, check that the electronic parking brake is fully applied. Warning light 4 on

switch 3 and warning light (P) on the instrument panel illuminate to show that the parking brake is applied but switch off when the doors are locked.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (3/4)

Special cases

To park on a slope or while towing a trailer, for example, pull switch 3 for a few seconds to gain the maximum braking.

To park the vehicle without applying the electronic parking brake (if there is a risk of freezing, for example):

• switch off the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button 1 or by turning the ignition key 2;
• manually release the electronic parking brake;
• with a gear or position P engaged, release the brake pedal and the switch 3.

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (4/4)

If the message "Electric failure DANGER" or "Check battery" appears, manually activate the electronic parking brake by pulling switch 3 (or position the gear lever in P for automatic gearboxes) before stopping the engine.

Risk of loss of immobilisation of the vehicle.

Call an approved Dealer.

Never leave your vehicle without moving the selector lever to position P and switching off the engine.

This is because when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running and a gear engaged, the vehicle may begin to move.

There is a risk of accidents.

Versions with an automatic gearbox

For safety reasons, automatic release is deactivated when the driver's door is open or not shut properly and the engine is running (in order to prevent the vehicle from moving without the driver). The "Release parking brake manually" message appears on the instrument panel when the driver depresses the accelerator.

If no lights or sounds are apparent, this indicates a fault in the instrument panel. This indicates that it is essential to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow). Ensure that the vehicle is correctly immobilised and contact an approved Dealer.

Operating faults

- If there is a fault, the warning light illuminates on the instrument panel accompanied by the "Check parking brake" message and, in

some cases, the (P) warning light.

Contact your approved Dealer straight away.

- If there is an assisted parking brake fault, the warning light STOP comes on, along with the message "Braking system fault", a beep and, in some

cases, the warning light

This means that you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow.

It is therefore essential to immobilise the vehicle by engaging first gear (manual gearbox) or position P (automatic gearbox). If the slope requires it, chock the vehicle.

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO DRIVING (1/6)

Fuel consumption is accredited in accordance with a standard regulatory method. Identical for all manufacturers, this enables vehicles to be compared with one another. Consumption in real time depends on vehicle usage conditions, the equipment fitted and the user's driving style. To optimise fuel consumption, please refer to the following advice.

Depending on the vehicle, you will have various functions which enable you to lower your fuel consumption:

– the rev counter with ECO zone;
- gear change indicator;
– the driving style indicator;
- the journey record and eco-driving advice via the multimedia screen;
- ECO mode;
- the Stop and Start function (refer to "Stop and Start function" in Section 2).

Warning light is displayed on the instrument panel when parameter "Free wheel in ECO mode" is activated (ON in menu "User settings").

If fitted on the vehicle, the navigation system provides additional information.

On the instrument panel A or B

Depending on the vehicle, the information display can be organised and customised based on the instrument panel customisation style selected from the multimedia screen.

The rev counter with ECO zone 1

Driving in the ECO zone helps you optimise fuel consumption under most circumstances.

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (2/6)

Gear change indicator 2

To obtain optimum consumption levels, a warning light on the instrument panel lets you know the best time to move up or down a gear:

move up a gear;

move down a gear.

If you regularly follow this indicator, you will reduce your vehicle's fuel consumption.

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (3/6)

Driving style indicator 3

Informs you about the driving style adopted in real time. This is shown by indicator light 3.

The more petals there are on indicator 3, the smoother and more economical your driving.

If you regularly monitor this indicator, you will reduce your vehicle's fuel consumption.

Toactivate/deactivate the driving style indicator, please see the multimedia system instructions.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

On the multimedia screen

Journey record

Once the engine is switched off, you will see "Journey record" displayed on the screen 4, enabling you to view information relating to your last journey.

This indicates:

– average fuel consumption;
– number of miles/kilometres travelled;
- number of miles/kilometres saved. This corresponds to driving without fuel consumption (deceleration and/or foot off the accelerator pedal).

An overall rating from 0 to 100 is displayed to let you assess your eco driving performance. The higher the rating, the lower the fuel consumption. Eco advice is given to help improve your performance.

With your favourite journeys saved, you can compare your performance between trips and the performance of other vehicle users.

For more information, please see the multimedia system instructions.

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (4/6)

ECO mode

ECO mode is a function which optimises fuel consumption. It acts upon certain power consuming systems in the vehicle (heating, air conditioning, power-assisted steering etc.) and on certain driving actions (acceleration, gear changing, cruise control, deceleration etc.).

Limiting acceleration enables low fuel consumption in urban and surrounding areas. When ECO mode is in use, it is normal to notice a change in the heating level.

Free wheel in ECO mode

Depending on the vehicle, for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, in the deceleration phases (with the foot fully off the accelerator pedal), switching to freewheeling (automatic neutral) decreases engine braking and allows you to farther without accelerating in order to save fuel.

To activate/deactivate the "free wheel" mode, see "Vehicle settings customisation menu" in Section 1.

Activating the function

The function can be activated:

• by pressing switch 5;
• by pressing the switch 6 (please refer to the information on "Multi-Sense" in Section 3);
• from the navigation menu on the multimedia screen (please refer to the multimedia instructions).

The warning light ECO comes on on the instrument panel to confirm activation.

While driving, it is possible to leave the ECO mode temporarily in order to improve engine performance.

For this, depress the accelerator pedal firmly and fully.

ECO mode is reactivated when you take pressure off the accelerator pedal.

Disabling the function

Press switch 6.

The warning light ECO goes out on the instrument panel to confirm deactivation.

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (5/6)

Driving advice and ECO driving

Behaviour

• Drive carefully for the first few miles until the engine reaches its normal operating temperature, rather than let it warm up while the vehicle is stationary.
• Speed is expensive.

• Dynamic driving with a lot of frequent acceleration and braking is expensive on fuel in comparison to the time saved.

• Do not overrev the engine in the intermediate gears.
  You should always use the highest gear possible.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Brake as little as possible. If you anticipate an obstacle or bend in advance, you may then simply release the accelerator pedal.
• Do not try to maintain the same speed up a hill, accelerate no more than you would on flat ground. Keep your foot in the same position on the accelerator pedal.
• Double declutching and accelerating before switching off the engine are unnecessary in modern vehicles.

- Bad weather, flooded roads:

Do not drive through floods if the water is above the lower edge of the wheel rims.

Obstructions to the driver

On the driver's side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the d components, and checking regularly. Do not lay one top of another.

There is a risk of wedging the pedals.

DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (6/6)

Tyres

• An underinflated tyre increases fuel consumption.
• Opt for the highest speed pressure or the pressure recommended to optimise fuel consumption indicated on edge of the driver's door (please refer to the information on "Tyre inflation pressure" in Section 4).
• The use of non-recommended tyres can increase fuel consumption.

Advice on use

• Favour the ECO mode.
• Electricity is fuel; switch off all the electrical components which are not really needed. However (safety first), keep your lights on when the visibility is bad ("see and be seen").
• Use the air vents. Driving with the windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h) will increase fuel consumption by 4% .
• Never fill the fuel tank right to the brim to avoid overflow.

- In vehicles fitted with air conditioning, it is normal to observe an increase in fuel consumption (especially in urban conditions) when it is used. For vehicles fitted with manual air conditioning, switch off the system when it is not required.

Recommendations for reducing consumption and therefore helping to preserve the environment:

If the vehicle has been parked in the sun, open the doors for a few moments to let the hot air escape before starting the engine.

• Do not leave an empty roof rack fitted to the vehicle.
• It is better to fit a trailer for bulky objects.
• When towing a caravan, fit a wind deflector and adjust it carefully.
• Avoid using the car for door-to-door calls (short journeys with long waits in between) because the engine never reaches its normal operating temperature.

MAINTENANCE AND ANTIPOLLUTION ADVICE

Your vehicle complies with criteria for recycling and recovering vehicles at the end of their service life, which entered into force in 2015.

Some parts of your vehicle have therefore been designed to facilitate future recycling.

These parts are easy to remove so that they can be recovered and reprocessed by recycling companies.

By virtue of its design, moderate fuel consumption and initial settings, your vehicle also conforms to current anti-pollution regulations. The manufacturer is actively striving to reduce pollutant exhaust gas emissions and to save energy. But the fuel consumption of your vehicle and the level of pollutant exhaust gas emissions are also your responsibility. Ensure that it is maintained and used correctly.

Maintenance

It is important to remember that failure to respect antipollution regulations could lead to legal action being taken against the vehicle owner.

In addition, replacing engine, fuel supply system and exhaust components with parts other than those originally recommended by the manufacturer may alter your vehicle so that it no longer complies with anti-pollution regulations.

Have your vehicle adjusted and checked by an authorised dealer, in accordance with the instructions given in your maintenance schedule: they will have all the equipment necessary for ensuring that your vehicle is maintained to its original standard.

Engine adjustments

- Spark plugs: for optimum conditions of use, output and performance the specifications laid down by our Design Department must be strictly applied.

If the spark plugs have to be changed, use the make, type and gap specified for your vehicle's engine. Contact an authorised dealer for this.

- Ignition and idle speed: no adjustment is needed.

- Air filter, fuel filter: a choked element will reduce efficiency. It must be replaced.

Exhaust gas monitoring system

The exhaust gas monitoring system will detect any operating faults in the vehicle's antipollution system.

If this system malfunctions, toxic substances may be released into the atmosphere or damage may occur.

This indicator light on the instrument panel indicates pos-ults in the system.

This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out when the engine is started.

- If it lights up continuously, consult an approved Dealer as soon as possible;

- if it flashes, reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. Contact an authorised dealer as soon as possible.

Refer to the information on "Reagent tank" in Section 1.

ENVIRONMENT

Your vehicle has been designed with respect for the environment in mind for its entire service life: during production, use and at the end of its life.

This commitment is illustrated by the Renault eco ^2 signature.

Manufacture

Your vehicle has been manufactured at a factory which complies with a policy to reduce the environmental impact on the surrounding areas (reduction of water and energy consumption, visual and noise pollution, atmospheric emissions and waste water; sorting and reusing waste).

Emissions

Your vehicle has been designed to emit fewer greenhouse gases (CO2) while in use, and therefore to consume less fuel (eg. 140 g/km, equivalent to 5.3 l/100 km for a diesel vehicle).

Our vehicles are also equipped with a particle filter system including a catalytic converter, an oxygen sensor and an active carbon filter (the latter prevents vapour from the fuel tank being released into the open air).

For certain diesel vehicles, this system also has a particle filter to reduce the volume of soot particles emitted.

Please make your own contribution towards protecting the environment too

- Worn parts replaced in the course of routine vehicle maintenance (vehicle battery, oil filter, air filter, batteries, etc.) and oil containers (empty or filled with used oil) must be disposed of through specialist organisations.

• At the end of the vehicle's service life, it should be sent to approved centres to ensure that it is recycled.
  – In all cases, comply with local legislation.

Recycling

Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and 95% recoverable.

To achieve these objectives, many of the vehicle components have been designed to enable them to be recycled. The materials and structures have been carefully designed to allow these components to be easily removed and reprocessed by specialist companies.

In order to preserve raw material resources, this vehicle incorporates numerous parts made from recycled plastics or renewable materials (vegetable or animal-derived materials such as cotton or wool).

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (1/3)

If the vehicle is equipped with the function, this system monitors the tyre pressure.

Operating principle

Each wheel (except for the emergency spare wheel) has a sensor in the inflation valve which periodically measures the tyre pressure.

The system displays the current pressures on the instrument panel 1 and alerts the driver in the event of insufficient pressure.

Resetting the standard level for the tyre pressures

This should be done:

• when the standard tyre pressure needs to be changed to adapt to usage conditions (empty, carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.);
• after swapping a wheel (however this practice is not recommended);
• after changing a wheel.

It should always be done after checking the tyre pressure of all four tyres when cold.

Tyre pressures must correspond to the current usage of the vehicle (empty, carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.).

Resetting can also be done from the multifunction screen 3 if your vehicle is fitted with a navigation system. Select the menu "Vehicle", "Tyre pressure".

Resetting procedure

With the ignition on:

– repeatedly and briefly press the control 2 to select the tyre pressure display and, depending on the vehicle, the "Tyre pressure" function;
- press and hold (around 3 seconds) the button 2 to launch the reset. The flashing tyres followed by the messages "Learning TP initiated" and then "Tyres location in progress" indicates that the reset request for the tyre pressure reference value has been acknowledged.

Reset can take several minutes of driving.

If the resetting is followed by short trips, the message "Tyres location in progress" can remain displayed after successive restarts.

Note

The standard tyre pressure cannot be less than that recommended and indicated on the door frame.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (2/3)

Display

The display 1 and the warning light 4

on the instrument panel warn you of any tyre pressure faults (flat tyre, punctured tyre, system fault, etc.).

For your safety, the warning light STOP requires you to stop immediately as soon as traffic conditions allow.

Two identical line drawings of a car with labeled sections A and B, no text or symbols present.

23491

"Adjust tyre pressure"

A wheel B is shown, depending on the vehicle, in orange or white accompanied by the warning light 4 [icon] fixed and the message "Adjust tyre pressure". They indicate that a wheel is deflated.

Check and, if necessary, readjust the pressures of the four wheels when cold.

The warning light 4 goes off after a few minutes' driving.

"Puncture"

A wheel B is shown, depending on the vehicle, in red or white accompanied

by the warning light 4 [!] fixed, the message "Puncture" and a beep. This message appears along with the

STOP warning light. They indicate that the affected wheel is punctured or severely underinflated. Replace it or contact an approved dealer if it is punctured. Top up the tyre pressure if the wheel is deflated.

"Check tyre pressure sensors"

A wheel A disappears, the warning

light 4 flashes for several seconds then comes on continuously and the message "Check tyre pressure sensors" appears.

This message appears along with the warning light. They indicate that at least one wheel is not fitted with sensors (e.g. emergency spare wheel). Otherwise, consult an authorised dealer.

The sudden loss of pressure in a tyre (burst tyre, etc.) cannot be detected by the system.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (3/3)

"Tyres location failure"

This message “Tyres location failure” appears when driving if one or more wheels have been fitted with sensors not recognised by Renault.

Consult an approved dealer

Readjustment of tyre pressures

The tyre pressures should be adjusted when cold (please refer to the label located on the edge of the driver's door). If the tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold, the recommended pressures should be increased by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI). Never deflate a hot tyre.

Replacing wheels/tyres

This system requires specific equipment (wheels, tyres, hubcaps, etc.). Please see the information on "Tyres" in Section 5.

Contact an approved Dealer to fit new tyres and to find out about available accessories compatible with the system and available from your dealer network: the use of any other accessory could affect the correct operation of the system or damage a sensor.

Emergency spare wheel

If the vehicle is equipped with an emergency spare wheel, it will not have a sensor.

Tyre repair product and inflation kit

Because the valves are specially designed, only use equipment approved by the approved network. Please refer to "Tyre inflation kit" in Section 5.

Changing a wheel

The system may take several minutes depending on use for the new wheel po-

sitions and pressures to be recognised; check the tyre pressures after all operations.

This function is an additional driving aid.

However, the function is not intended to replace the

driver. It cannot, therefore, under any circumstances replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the driver. Check the tyre pressures, including the emergency spare wheel, once a month.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (1/5)

• ABS (anti-lock braking system) ;
• ESC (electronic stability control) with understeer control and traction control;
  – emergency brake assist;
• hill start assistance.

Other driving assistance systems are detailed on the following pages.

These functions are an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions, enabling the vehicle behav-

iour to be adapted to suit the driving conditions.

The functions do not take the place of the driver. They do not increase the vehicle's limits and should not encourage you to drive more quickly. Therefore, they can under no circumstances replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be ready for sudden incidents which may occur when driving).

ABS (anti-lock braking system)

Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents the wheels from locking, allowing the stopping distance to be managed and keeping control of the vehicle.

Under these circumstances, the vehicle can be steered to avoid an obstacle whilst braking. In addition, this system can increase stopping distances, particularly on roads with low surface grip (wet ground etc.).

You will feel a pulsation through the brake pedal each time the system is activated. The ABS does not in any way improve the vehicle's physical performance relating to the road surface and roadholding. It is still essential to follow the rules of good driving practice (such as driving at a safe distance from the vehicle in front etc.).

In an emergency, apply firm and continuous pressure to the brake pedal. There is no need to pump it repeatedly. The ABS will modulate the force applied in the braking system.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (2/5)

Operating faults:

• and (ABS) lit up on the instrument panel accompanied by the messages "Check ABS", "Check braking system" and "Check ESC": this indicates that the ABS, the ESC and the emergency brake assist are disabled. Braking is always enabled;
• (ABS), (!), and STOP lit on the instrument panel accompanied by the message "Braking system fault": this indicates a fault in the braking system.

In both cases, consult an approved dealer.

Warning light STOP requires you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions

allow. Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.

Your braking systems are partially operational. However, it is dangerous to brake suddenly and

it is essential to stop immediately, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Contact an approved dealer.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (3/5)

Electronic stability control ESC with understeer control and traction control

Electronic stability control ESC

This system helps you to keep control of the vehicle in critical driving conditions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip on a bend, etc.).

Operating principle

A sensor in the steering wheel detects the direction selected by the driver.

Other sensors throughout the vehicle measure the actual direction.

The system compares the direction selected by the driver and the actual direction of the vehicle and corrects this as necessary by applying the brakes selectively and/or acting on the engine power. If the system is triggered, the

indicator light flashes on the in-ent panel.

Understeer control

This system optimises the action of the ESC in the case of pronounced understeer (loss of front axle road holding).

Traction control

This system helps to limit wheelspin of the drive wheels and to control the vehicle when pulling away accelerating or decelerating.

Operating principle

Using the wheel sensors, the system measures and compares the speed of the drive wheels at all times and slows down their over-rotation. If a wheel is starting to slip, the system brakes automatically until the drive supplied becomes compatible with the level of grip under the wheel again.

The system also adjusts the engine speed to the grip available under the wheels, independently of the pressure exerted on the accelerator pedal.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating fault the message "Check ESC" and

warning light and appear on the instrument panel.

In this case, the ESC and traction control system are deactivated. Consult an authorised dealer.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (4/5)

Emergency brake assist

This system supplements the ABS and helps reduce vehicle stopping distances.

Operating principle

The system is for detecting an emergency braking situation. In this case, the braking assistance immediately develops maximum power and may trigger ABS regulation.

ABS braking is maintained as long as the brake pedal is applied.

Hazard warning lights switching on Depending on the vehicle, these may light up in the event of sudden deceleration.

Braking anticipation

Depending on the vehicle, when you rapidly release the accelerator, the system anticipates the braking manoeuvre in order to reduce stopping distances.

Special cases

When using the cruise control:

• if you use the accelerator, when you release it, the system may be triggered;
• if you do not use the accelerator, the system will not be triggered.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating fault the message "Check braking system" appears on the instrument panel along with the warning light.

Consult an approved dealer.

DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (5/5)

Hill start assistance

Depending on the gradient of the incline, this system assists the driver when starting on a hill. It prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards by automatically applying the brakes when the driver lifts his/her foot off the brake pedal to depress the accelerator pedal.

System operation

It only operates when the gear lever is in a position other than neutral (other than N or P for automatic transmissions) and the vehicle is completely stationary (brake pedal depressed). The system holds the vehicle for approximately 2 seconds. The brakes are then released (the vehicle will move according to the slope).

The hill start assistance system cannot completely prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in all sit-

uations (extremely steep gradients, etc.).

In all cases, the driver may depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.

The hill start assistance function should not be used for prolonged stops: use the brake pedal.

This function is not designed to immobilise the vehicle permanently. If necessary, use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

The driver must remain particularly vigilant when driving on slippery or low-grip surfaces.

Risk of serious injury.

ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (1/7)

Front view of a modern sedan car with the number 1 pointing to the side window (no visible text or symbols on the car itself)

Using information from the radar-camera 1, the system calculates the distance which separates it from the vehicle in front and the surrounding pedestrians.

It notifies the driver if there is a risk of head-on collision. The driver can then brake the vehicle to limit the damage arising from a collision.

Note: make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

This system can apply maximum braking to the vehicle until it is completely stationary if necessary.

For safety reasons, always wear your seat belt when travelling in your vehicle and make sure that it is loaded so that no items can be thrown forward and hit the occupants.

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace

the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (2/7)

Detection of vehicles

Operation

When driving (speed between about 4.34 and 99.2 mph (7 and 160 km/h)), if there is a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, the system:

- warns you of a collision risk:

• the warning light is displayed in red on the instrument panel, accompanied by a beep; or
• the indicator 2 is displayed in red on the instrument panel and, depending on the vehicle, on the head up display, accompanied by a beep.

If the driver depresses the brake pedal and the system still detects a risk of collision, the brake force is increased.

- triggers braking:

if the driver fails to react following the alert and collision becomes imminent.

Black and white illustration of a car on a road with a warning sign (no text or symbols)

39526

You can interrupt braking at any point by:

• tapping the accelerator pedal; or
• turning the steering wheel in an avoidance manoeuvre.

Special features

When the vehicle speed:

• is less than 27.9 mph (45 km/h) approximately, the warning and braking are activated at the same time;
• is between about 27.9 mph (45 km/h) and 48 mph (80 km/h) approximately, the warning is activated. Braking will only be triggered if the vehicle preceding you is moving. Braking is not activated for stationary vehicles;
• is between about 48 mph (80 km/h) and 99.2 mph (160 km/h), the warning and braking are only triggered if the vehicle preceding you is moving. The warning and braking are not activated for stationary vehicles;
• is above 99.2 mph (160 km/h), the system is not active.

ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (3/7)

Detection of pedestrians

Operation

When driving (speed between about 4.2 mph (7 km/h) and 36 mph (60 km/h), when there is a risk of impact with a pedestrian:

• the warning light is displayed in red on the instrument panel, accompanied by a beep; or
• the indicator 3 is displayed in red on the instrument panel and, depending on the vehicle, on the head up display, accompanied by a beep.

When the impact is imminent, the system activates the braking.

The system can apply maximum braking to the vehicle until it is completely stationary if necessary.

ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (4/7)

Activating or deactivating the system

For vehicles fitted with a navigation system

On the multifunction screen 4, select the "Vehicle" menu, "Driving assistance", and "Active braking", and then choose "ON" or "OFF".

You can access menu "Driving assistance" directly from button 5

Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered parts (6 and 7) highlighting the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols beyond labels)

For vehicle not fitted with a navigation system

• With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch 6 OK to access the settings menu;
  – repeatedly press the control 7 up or down until you reach the "Driving assistance" menu. Press the switch 6 OK;
• repeatedly press control 7 up or down until you reach the "Active braking" menu, then press the switch 6 OK.

Press the switch 6 OK again to activate or deactivate the function:

function activated

function deactivated

The warning light is displayed on the instrument panel when the system is deactivated.

This system is reactivated each time the ignition is switched on.

ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (5/7)

Conditions for non-activation of the system

The system cannot be activated:

• when the gear lever is in neutral;
• when the parking brake is activated;
• while cornering.

As a general rule, if the driver shows signs of attention (action on the steering wheel, pedals etc.), the system delays its operation or does not activate.

Temporarily not available

When the system detects a tempo-

rary unavailability, the warning light lights up on the instrument panel accompanied by the message "Active braking: sensor blind" or, depending on the vehicle, "Radar-camera: no visibility".

The possible causes are:

• the system is temporarily blinded (glare from the sun, dipped beam headlights, bad weather conditions etc.). The system will be operational again when visibility conditions are better;
• the system is temporarily disrupted (for example: windscreen obscured by dirt, ice, snow etc.). In this case, park the vehicle and switch off the engine. Clean the windscreen. When you next start the engine, the warning light and the message go out;
• if this is not the case, this may arise from another cause; contact an Approved Dealer.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating fault, the warning light lights up on the instrument panel, with the message "Active braking disconnected". Consult an approved dealer

ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (6/7)

Active emergency braking

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle. The triggering of this function may be delayed or prevented when the system detects clear signs of control of the vehicle by the driver (action on the steer-

ing wheel, pedals etc.).

System servicing/repairs

• In the event of an impact, the radar-camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected. Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.
• Any work in the area where the radar-camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be carried out by a qualified professional.

Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

In the event of system disturbance

Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:

• a complex environment (metal bridge, tunnel etc.);
• poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
  – poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
• poor contrast between the object (vehicle, pedestrian etc.) and the surrounding area (e.g. pedestrian dressed in white located in a snowy area etc.);
  – being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.);
• windscreen obscured (by dirt, ice, snow, condensation etc.).

Risk of inadvertent braking.

ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (7/7)

Limitation of the system operation

– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The radar-camera area on the windscreen should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.

• The system cannot respond to small vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles as effectively as to other vehicles.
• The system may not operate properly when the road surface is slippery (rain, snow, black ice etc.).
• To ensure correct operation, the system needs to distinguish the complete outline of the pedestrian. So the system cannot detect:

— pedestrians in the darkness or in poor lighting conditions;
– partially visible pedestrians:
– pedestrians less than approximately 80 cm tall;
– pedestrians carrying large objects;
- ...

Deactivating the function

You must disable the function if:

– the brake lights are not functioning;
– the area of the radar-camera has been damaged (on the windscreen side or the interior rear-view mirror side);
– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns);
- the windscreen is cracked or distorted (do not carry out repairs on this area of the windscreen; have it changed by an Authorised Dealer).

Halting the function

You can halt the active braking function at any time by tapping the accelerator pedal or by turning the steering wheel in a avoidance manoeuvre.

In the event of the system behaving abnormally, deactivate it and consult an authorised dealer.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (1/4)

Front view of a modern sedan car with visible headlights and grille (no text or symbols)

Using information from the camera 1, the function warns the driver if he crosses a continuous or broken line without activating the direction indicator lights.

Note: make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to the due care and attention river, who should at all times control of the vehicle.

The lane departure warning function does not correct the vehicle's trajectory.

Activation/deactivation

Vehicles not fitted with the "Lane keeping assist" function

From the multifunction screen 2: select "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "Lane departure warning", then choose "ON" or "OFF".

Vehicles fitted with the "Lane keeping assist" function

From the multifunction screen 2: select "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "Lane

Keeping" then to activate or "OFF" to deactivate the "Lane Keeping Assist" function.

You can additionally activate the lane keeping assist function (refer to the information on "Lane Keeping Assist" in Section 2).

You can access menu "Driving assistance" directly from button 3

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (2/4)

Operation

When the function is activated, the indicators 4 for the left and right lines, or

depending on the vehicle, the warning light, are displayed in grey on the instrument panel.

The function is set to notify the driver if:

- speed is between about 43.4 mph (70 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h); and

- the line indicators 4 are coloured green or, depending on the vehicle,

the warning light is white.

The function triggers an alert if a line is crossed without the direction indicator being activated.

The function alerts the driver:

- by using a beep or, depending on the vehicle, a vibration of the steering wheel; and

- the indicator of the line crossed turns red or, depending on the vehi-

cle, the 5 warning light is displayed on the instrument panel.

Note: on bends, the function allows for slightly cutting the bend.

Conditions in which the function is not available

- Indicators activated or having been activated approximately four seconds prior to departing from the lane;

- very fast lane departure;

– driving continuously near a line;

- 4 seconds approximately after changing lanes;

- tight bends;

- impaired visibility;

- ...

If the function is unavailable, the line indicators 4 or, depending on the vehicle,

the warning light are displayed in grey on the instrument panel.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (3/4)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel with a digital display (no visible text or symbols)

Adjustment

Vehicles not fitted with the "Lane keeping assist" function

From the multifunction screen 2, select "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "Lane departure warning setting".

• "VOLUME": adjust the volume of the warning;
• "Intensity": adjust the level of steering wheel vibration;

- "sensitivity": adjust the sensitivity level for line detection. To do this, select:

• "Low": line detected when crossing;
• "Average": line detected on proach;
• "high": line detected nearby.

Vehicles fitted with the "Lane keeping assist" function:

From the multifunction screen 2, select "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "SETTINGS".

• "VOLUME": adjust the volume of the warning;
• "Intensity": adjust the level of steering wheel vibration;

• "SENSITIVITY": adjust the sensitivity level for line detection. To do this, select:

• "Low": line detected when crossing;

• "Average": line detected on approach;
• "high": line detected nearby.

Operating faults

In the event of a malfunction, the left and right line indicators or, depending

on the vehicle, the warning light disappear or stay grey on the instrument panel. In some cases, they are accompanied by the message "Lane departure warning check" or the warning light on the instrument panel. Consult an approved dealer.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (4/4)

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

System servicing/repairs

• In the event of an impact, the camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected. Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.
• Any work in the area where the camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be carried out by a qualified professional.

Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

In the event of system disturbance

Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:

• windscreen obscured (by dirt, ice, snow, condensation etc.);
• a complex environment (tunnel etc.);
  — poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
• poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
  – road markings which are worn, lacking in contrast or very widely spaced from one another (lines partially erased etc);
  – being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.);
  – the road is narrow, winding or undulating (tight bends etc.);
• closely following a vehicle travelling in the same lane.

Risk of false alarms or absence of warnings

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (1/4)

Front view of a modern sedan car with the number 1 pointing to the side window (no visible text or symbols)

Using information from the camera 1, the function is triggered if a continuous or broken line is crossed without activating the direction indicator lights, with corrective action on the steering system of the vehicle.

A notification on the instrument panel appears to warn you of this.

On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.

Note: make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace

the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (2/4)

Activation/deactivation

From the multifunction screen 2: select "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "Lane

Keeping" then ▶/EA to activate or "OFF" to deactivate it.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and numbered component (no text or symbols)

When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the "Lane Departure Warning" function is automatically activated (please refer to the information on "Lane Departure Warning" in Section 2).

You can access menu "Driving assistance" directly from button 3

The function is deactivated by default every time the engine is started.

Operation

When the function is activated, the correction indicators 4 for the left and right lines are displayed in grey on the instrument panel.

The function is set to react if:

• speed is between about 43.4 mph (70 km/h) and 99.2 mph (160 km/h); and
  – the correction indicators 4 are green.

The function reacts if the vehicle approaches or crosses a line without activation of the indicator lights. In these cases:

• the function triggers corrective action on the vehicle's steering system and trajectory;
• the indicator 4 on the same side as the crossed side line turns orange on the instrument panel.

Note: on bends, the function allows for slightly cutting the bend.

You can retake control of the vehicle at any time by operating the steering wheel.

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (3/4)

Special case

When the function is set to react or it reacts and cannot detect any further action from the driver on the steering wheel:

• the message "Keep control" appears on the instrument panel;
  – the right-hand and left-hand correction indicators turn orange;
• a beep sounds.

If the driver does not take action, the system may switch off the warnings above and make the function unavailable until the next action of the driver on the steering wheel.

Conditions in which the function is not available

• Correction indicators activated or having been activated approximately four seconds prior to crossing the line;
• the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel;

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and touchscreen display (no visible text or symbols)

• only one line is detected;
• very fast lane departure;
  – driving continuously near a line;
• impaired visibility;
• 4 seconds approximately after changing lanes;
• during tight bends;
  – the lane width is too narrow;
• ...

When the function is unavailable, the correction indicators are displayed in grey on the instrument panel.

Adjustment

From the multifunction screen 2, select "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "SETTINGS":

"SENSITIVITY": adjust the sensitivity level for line detection. To do this, select:

• "Low": line detected when crossing;
• "Average": line detected on approach;
• "high": line detected nearby.

Operating faults

In the event of a malfunction, the left-hand and right-hand correction indicators disappear or remain grey on the instrument panel.

In some cases, they are accompanied by the message "Check Lane Keeping" or the warning light on the instrument panel.

Consult an approved dealer.

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (4/4)

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

System servicing/repairs

• In the event of an impact, the camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected. Deactivate the function and consult an authorised dealer.
• Any work in the area where the camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be carried out by a qualified professional.

Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

In the event of system disturbance

Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:

• windscreen obscured (by dirt, ice, snow, condensation etc.);
• a complex environment (tunnel etc.);
  — poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
• poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
  – road markings which are worn, lacking in contrast or very widely spaced from one another (lines partially erased etc);
  – being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.);
  – the road is narrow, winding or undulating (tight bends etc.);
• closely following a vehicle travelling in the same lane.

In this case, the "Lane Keeping Assist" may react incorrectly or not at all.

Risk of unwanted, incorrect correction or no correction of trajectory.

Deactivating the function

You must disable the function if:

– the area of the camera has been damaged (on the windscreen side or the interior rear-view mirror side);
- the road is slippery (snow, black ice, aquaplaning, gravel etc.) ;
– poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
- the windscreen is cracked or distorted (do not carry out windscreen repairs in this area; have it changed by an Authorised Dealer);
– the vehicle is towing a trailer or a caravan;
– the vehicle is entering an area with several surface markings (an area with road works etc.).

BLIND SPOT WARNING (1/4)

This system alerts the driver to other vehicles in the detection zone A.

The system is activated when the vehicle's speed is between approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) and 140 km/h (87 mph).

This function uses sensors 1 installed in the front and rear bumper of both sides.

Special feature

Make sure that the sensors are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.). If a sensor is obscured, the message "Blind spot clean sensor" will appear on the instrument panel. Clean the sensors.

This function is an additional aid which indicates other vehicles in the blind spot area.

It can never in any case be a substitute for care nor for the driver's responsibility while in charge of his vehicle.

The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driving: always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving obstacles (such as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind spot when manoeuvring.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (2/4)

Activation/deactivation

Vehicles fitted with a navigation system

On the multifunction screen 2, select the "vehicle" menu, "Driving assistance", and "Blind spot alert", and then choose "ON" or "OFF".

You can access menu "Driving assistance" directly from button 3

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system

• With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch 4 OK to access the settings menu;
  – repeatedly press the control 5 up or down until you reach the "Driving assistance" menu. Press the switch 4 OK;

• repeatedly press the control 5 up or down until you reach the Blind spot alert menu, then press the switch 4 OK.

• press the 4 OK switch again to activate or deactivate the function.

When the engine is started, the system remembers its position when the ignition was last switched off.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (3/4)

Indicator 6

An indicator light 6 is located on each door mirror 7.

Note: clean the door mirrors 7 regularly so that the indicators 6 can be seen.

⑥ 39460

Operation

This function gives a warning:

• when the vehicle speed is between approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and 87 mph (140 km/h);
• when another vehicle is in the blind spot area and travelling in the same direction as your vehicle.

If your vehicle is overtaking another vehicle, the indicator 6 will be activated only if that vehicle remains in the blind spot for more than one second.

Display B

The function is activated and has not detected any vehicles.

Display C

First warning: the indicator 6 means that a vehicle has been detected in the blind spot.

Display D

When the direction indicator is activated, the indicator light 6 flashes when a vehicle is detected in the blind spot on the side towards which you are about to steer. If you cancel the direction indicator, the function will return to the initial warning (display C).

The system's detection range operates according to a standard lane width. If you are driving in narrow traffic lanes, it may detect vehicles in other lanes.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (4/4)

B

⑥
39460

©

D

Conditions for non-function

• If the object is not moving;
• if traffic is heavy;
  – the road is winding;
• if front and rear sensors both detect an object at the same time (e.g. when passing an articulated lorry).
  一...

Operating faults

If the system detects a fault, the message "Check blind spot alert" is displayed on the instrument panel. Consult an approved dealer.

Note: when the engine is started, the indicator light 6, display B, flashes three times. It is normal.

- The system's detection range operates according to a standard lane width. If you are driving in wide traf-

fic lanes, the system might not be able to detect a vehicle in the blind spot.

- The system might be disrupted momentarily if it is exposed to strong electromagnetic waves (as beneath high-tension power lines) or to very poor weather conditions (heavy rain, snow etc.). Remain aware of driving conditions.

There is a risk of accidents.

Because sensors have been installed in the bumpers, any work (repairs, replacements, touching up of

paintwork) must be carried out by a qualified professional.

SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (1/3)

Front view of a modern sedan car with visible headlights and side panel (no text or symbols)

Using the information from the radar-camera 1, this function informs the driver of the time interval between him and the vehicle in front so that a safe stopping distance between the two vehicles can be maintained.

Note: make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

The function is activated when the vehicle speed is between about 18.6 and 124 mph (30 and 200 km/h).

When the engine is started, the function maintains the same status that was active when the engine was last stopped.

Activating/deactivating the function

From the multifunction screen 2, select menu "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "Distance warning" then choose "ON" or "OFF".

You can access menu "Driving assistance" directly from button 3

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to the due care and attention river, who should at all times control of the vehicle.

SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (2/3)

39301

Operation

Upon activating the function, indicator 4 notifies the driver of the distance separating them from the vehicle in front.

• A (grey): function not operational;
• A (green): no vehicle detected;

• B (green): the time interval is greater than or equal to around two seconds (distance between the two vehicles adapted to your speed);

• C (orange): the time interval falls between around 1 and 2 seconds (insufficient distance between the two vehicles);

• D (red): the time interval is less than or equal to around one second (very insufficient distance between the two vehicles).

If the interval between the two vehicles is less than around 0.5 seconds, notification 4, display D, will flash on the instrument panel. Under certain conditions, the time interval may not be displayed:

• while cornering;
• when changing lane;
• if the vehicle in front is sufficiently far or outside the range of the sensor.

On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.

This function is essential if adaptive cruise control is activated.

The measurement is displayed for information only: the system performs no action on the vehicle.

This function is not designed for use in urban conditions or for a dynamic driving style (sudden cornering, acceleration, braking, etc.), but rather for stable driving conditions.

The function does not interact with the braking system.

The windscreen must remain clean to ensure the correct operation of the system.

SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (3/3)

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

System servicing/repairs

• In the event of an impact, the radar-camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected. Deactivate the function and consult an authorised dealer.
• Any work in the area where the radar-camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be carried out by a qualified professional.

Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

In the event of system disturbance

Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:

• a complex environment (tunnel etc.);
  – poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
  – poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
  — poor contrast between the vehicle preceding it and the surrounding area (e.g. white vehicle in a snowy area etc.);
• being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.);
  – the road is narrow, winding and undulating (tight bends etc.)

Risk of erroneous false alarms.

FATIGUE DETECTION WARNING (1/2)

The fatigue detection warning is a function which is useful on monotonous roads (motorways, high-speed roads etc.).

It analyses driver behaviour and takes account of events to inform you of any risk of fatigue, such as:

• steering wheel movement;
  – driver actions on other devices (indicators, windscreen washer, etc.);
  – time spent driving without stopping;
  一 ...

Activation/deactivation

Vehicles fitted with a navigation system

From the multimedia screen1: select "Vehicle", "Driving assistance", "Fatigue detection warn." then choose "ON" or "OFF".

This function is an additional driving aid in case of risk of fatigue. The function does not take the place of river.

Under no circumstances should this function replace the driver's care or responsibility whilst driving.

When the engine is started, the system remembers its position when the ignition was last switched off.

You can access menu "Driving assistance" directly from button 2

FATIGUE DETECTION WARNING (2/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system

• With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch 3 OK to access the settings menu;

• repeatedly press the control 4 up or down until you reach the "Driving assistance" menu. Press the switch 3 OK;

• repeatedly press the control 4 up or down until you reach the "Fatigue detection warn." menu, then press the switch 3 OK.

• press the 3 OK switch again to activate or deactivate the function.

Operation

The function is set to notify the driver if:

• the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 37.2 mph (60 km/h); and
• Approximately 15 minutes have passed since the deletion of the previous warning.

The function triggers an alert if the system detects repeated signs of fatigue in the driver at the steering wheel.

When a risk of fatigue is detected, the message "Fatigue warning have a break" is displayed on the instrument panel accompanied by a beep.

Press switch 3 OK to delete the warning.

It is advisable to stop as soon as possible for a break.

Note:

• if the warning is not deleted by pressing switch 3 OK, the beep repeats;
• the function may interpret certain driving styles as a sign of tiredness (sporty driving, incorrect driving, etc.) or driving along a road which is in poor condition.

Operating faults

If the system detects a fault, the message "Check fatigue warning" is displayed on the instrument panel. Consult an approved dealer.

OVERSPEED ALERT (1/3)

Front view of a modern sedan car with visible headlights and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

The overspeed alert with signage panel recognition notifies the driver that they are exceeding the speed limit for the section of road on which they are currently travelling.

Operating principle

The system detects speed limit signs on the side of the road and displays the speed limit.

It mainly uses information taken from the camera 1, attached to the wind-screen behind the rear-view mirror.

Note: make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

For vehicles which are equipped with it, the system also uses information from the navigation system.

Once the speed limiter is activated, you can adjust the speed limiter indication displayed by the system.

In the event of exceeding the speed limit, the sign display is modified (the characters change to red or the circle around the sign flashes) no notify you.

For vehicles equipped with a navigation system and if the vehicle is travelling in a country where the speed units differ from those of the vehicle, the system displays the speed limit sign in the unit of the country, alongside the speed limit converted to the unit used by the vehicle's instrument panel.

For countries where the speed limit is reduced during rainy weather on some types of roads, on vehicles equipped with a navigation system, the system can modify the limited speed after a few seconds of wiping the windscreen.

Special situations

The system does not take into account exceptional speed limit measures, such as peak pollution days.

On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.

OVERSPEED ALERT (2/3)

Activating/deactivating the system

Vehicles fitted with a navigation system

From the multimedia screen 2, select the "Vehicle" menu, "Driving assistance", "Speed alert settings" then choose "ON" or "OFF".

You can access menu "Driving assistance" directly from button 3

With the function activated and depending on local laws, you can activate the "increased vigilance zones". The system will notify you of the distance separating you from this zone, and while you are travelling in the zone.

Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system

• With the vehicle at a standstill, press and hold the switch 5 OK to access the settings menu;

• repeatedly press the control 6 up or down until you reach the "Driving assistance" menu. Press the switch 5 OK;

• repeatedly press the control 6 up or down until you reach the "Speed alert" menu, then press the switch 5 OK.

• press OK to turn the function on or off.

Varying the limit speed

If the speed limiter notification differs from the detected speed value, press and hold the switch 4:

• side a (+) to increase the notification speed to the detected speed;
• side b (-) to reduce the notification speed to the detected speed.

OVERSPEED ALERT (3/3)

Operating fault

The system cannot detect the speed limit if:

– the windscreen is not clean;
– the camera is blinded by the sun;
- there is insufficient visibility (night, fog, etc.);
- the signs are not legible (snow, etc.) or are hidden (by another vehicle or by trees);
– the information taken from the navigation system is not up to date.

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.

The system enables maximum speed signs to be detected and does not detect other signs.

The driver should not, however, ignore signs which are not detected by the system and should as a priority comply with the traffic signage and the highway code.

In the event of poor visibility (fog, snow, frost, etc.), it is possible that the system may not indicate the correct speed to the driver.

The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.

SPEED LIMITER (1/3)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and touchscreen, showing a close-up inset of the phone's keypad (no text or symbols visible)

The speed limiter function helps you stay within the driving speed limit that you choose, known as the limit speed.

Controls

1 Main "On/Off" switch.
2 Controls for:
a speed limiter activation, memory and increase (+);
b decreasing the speed limiter (-).
3 Activation and recall of memorised limited speed (R).
4 Speed limiter function standby (with limited speed memory) (O).

If you wish, you can associate the speed limiter and the "Overspeed alert" function (please refer to the information on the "Overspeed alert" in Section 2).

Switching on

Press switch 1 on side Ⓗ. The indicator light Ⓤ ^♀ comes on, lit orange, and the message "Speed limiter" appears on the instrument panel, accompanied by dashes to indicate that the speed limiter function is activated and waiting to store a limited speed.

To store the current speed, press switch 2 side a (+): the limited speed replaces the dashes.

The minimum stored speed is 20 mph (30 km/h).

SPEED LIMITER (2/3)

Driving

When a limited speed has been stored and this speed is not reached, driving is similar to driving a vehicle without the speed limiter function.

Once you have reached the stored speed, no effort on the accelerator pedal will allow you to exceed the programmed speed except in an emergency (refer to information on "Exceeding the limit speed").

Varying the limit speed

The speed limiter can be changed by repeatedly pressing the switch 2:

• side a (+) to increase the speed;
• side b (-) to reduce the speed.

The speed limiter function is in no way linked to the braking system.

Exceeding the limit speed

It is possible to exceed the limit speed at any time. To do this: press the accelerator pedal firmly and fully (beyond the resistance point).

While the speed is being exceeded, the speed limiter flashes red on the instrument panel.

Then, release the accelerator: the speed limiter function will return as soon as you reach a speed lower than the stored speed.

Limited speed cannot be maintained

If driving up or down a steep gradient, the system is unable to maintain the limited speed: the stored speed flashes red on the instrument panel and a beep sounds at regular intervals to inform you.

SPEED LIMITER (3/3)

Putting the function on standby

The speed limiter function is suspended when you press switch 4 (O). In this case, the limit speed remains stored and the message "Memorised" accompanied by this speed appears on the instrument panel.

Recalling the limit speed

If a speed has been saved, it can be recalled by pressing switch 3 (R).

When the speed limiter is set to standby, pressing on the side a (+) of the switch 2 reactivates the function without taking into account the memorised speed: it is the speed at which the vehicle is moving that is taken into account.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel and dashboard with an inset close-up of the phone app (no text or symbols visible)

Switching off the function

The speed limiter function is deactivated if you press switch 1: in this case a speed is no longer stored. The orange instrument panel warning light goes out, confirming that the function is stopped.

CRUISE CONTROL (1/4)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel and dashboard controls (no visible text or symbols)

The cruise control function helps you to maintain your driving speed at a speed that you choose, called the cruising speed.

This cruising speed may be set at any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

The cruise control function is in no way linked to the braking system.

Controls

1 Main "On/Off" switch.
2 Controls for:

a cruising speed activation, storage and increase (+);

b decreasing cruising speed (-).

3 Activation with recall of saved cruising speed (R).
4 Switch the function to standby (with cruising speed saved) (O).

This function is an additional driving aid. The function does not take the place of the driver. Therefore, it

can under no circumstances replace the driver's responsibility to respect speed limits and to be vigilant (the driver must always be ready to brake). Cruise control must not be used in heavy traffic, on winding or slippery roads (black ice, aquaplaning, gravel) and during bad weather (fog, rain, side winds etc.).

There is a risk of accidents.

CRUISE CONTROL (2/4)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and touchscreen, showing a close-up inset of the phone's keypad (no text or symbols visible)

Switching on

Press switch 1 on side 📋.

Indicator light ⚙️ comes on, lit green, and the message “Cruise control” appears on the instrument panel, accompanied by dashes to indicate that the cruise control function is activated and waiting to store a cruising speed.

Activating cruise control

At a steady speed (above approximately 18.6 mph (30 km/h)) press switch 2 side a (+): the function is activated and the current speed is memorised.

The cruising speed replaces the dashes and cruise control is confirmed by the appearance of the message "Cruise control" and the warning light.

If you try to activate the function below 20 mph (30 km/h), the message "Invalid speed" will be displayed and the function will remain inactive.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Driving

Once a cruising speed is memorised and the cruise control function is active, you may lift your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Please note that you must keep your feet close to the pedals in order to react in an emergency.

CRUISE CONTROL (3/4)

Adjusting the cruising speed

The cruising speed can be changed by pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:

• side a (+) to increase the speed;
• side b (-) to reduce the speed.

The cruise control function is in no way linked to the braking system.

Exceeding the cruising speed

The cruising speed may be exceeded at any time by depressing the accelerator pedal. While overtaking, the cruising speed flashes red on the instrument panel.

Then, release the accelerator: after a few seconds, the vehicle will automatically return to its set cruising speed.

Cruising speed cannot be maintained

If driving up or down a steep gradient, the system is unable to maintain the cruising speed: the stored speed is flashes red on the instrument panel to inform you of this situation.

CRUISE CONTROL (4/4)

Putting the function on standby

The function is set to standby if you:

• use the switch 4 (O);
• the brake pedal;
• depress the clutch pedal or the shift into neutral if the vehicle has an automatic gearbox.

In these three cases, the cruising speed remains stored and the message "Memorised" accompanied by this speed appears on the instrument panel. Standby is confirmed by the display of the cruising speed in grey and the message "Memorised".

Returning to the cruising speed

If a speed is stored, it can be recalled, once you are sure that the road conditions are suitable (traffic, road surface, weather conditions, etc.). Press switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h).

When the stored speed is recalled, activation of the cruise control is confirmed by the illumination of the cruising speed in green, along with the message "Cruise control".

NB: if the speed previously stored is much higher than the current speed, the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly to reach this threshold.

When the cruise control is set to standby, pressing on the side a (+) of the switch 2 reactivates the cruise control function without taking into account the stored speed: it is the speed at which the vehicle is moving that is taken into account.

Switching off the function

The cruise control function is deactivated if you press switch 1: in this case a speed is no longer stored. The green warning light and message on the instrument panel goes out to confirm that the function is deactivated.

Putting the cruise control on standby or switching it off does not cause a rapid reduction in speed: you make by depressing the brake

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (1/8)

The adaptive cruise control is a function which gives you the option, when traffic conditions permit (large free-flowing road or motorway), of maintaining a chosen speed, known as the cruising speed, while keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front in the same lane.

The function can be adjusted from 31 mph (50 km/h) to 99.2 mph (160 km/h).

The radar-camera has a range of around 120 metres.

Note:

• the driver should take account of the maximum legally permissible speed in the country where the vehicle is travelling;
• the adaptive cruise control can brake the vehicle up to a third of the braking capacity. Depending on the situation, the driver may need to brake harder.

On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.

This function is an additional driving aid. The function does not take the place of the driver.

Therefore, it can under no circumstances replace the driver's responsibility to respect speed limits and to be vigilant (the driver must always be ready to brake).

The adaptive cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic, on winding or slippery roads (black ice, aquaplaning, gravel) and during bad weather (fog, rain, side winds etc.).

There is a risk of accidents.

Front view of a modern sedan car with visible headlights and grille (no text or symbols)

Location of the radar-camera 1

Make sure the windscreen is not obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (2/8)

Controls

5 Main "On/Off" switch.
2 Controls for:

a cruising speed activation, storage and increase (+);

b decreasing cruising speed (-).

3 Activation with recall of saved cruising speed (R).
4 Switch the function to standby (with cruising speed saved) (O).
6 Adjusting following distance.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and touchscreen, showing a close-up of the phone's screen (no text or symbols visible)

Switching on

Press switch 5 on the side showing Warning light comes on, lit green, and the message "Adaptive cruise ctrl" appears on the instrument panel, accompanied by dashes to indicate that the cruise control function is activated and waiting to store a cruising speed.

Activating cruise control

At a steady speed (above approximately 31 mph (50 km/h)), press switch 2 side a (+): the function is activated and the current speed is memorised.

The cruising speed replaces the dashes and cruise control is confirmed by the appearance of the message "Adaptive cruise ctrl" and the warning light. If you try to activate the function below 31 mph (50 km/h) or above 99 mph (160 km/h), the message "Invalid speed" is displayed and the function remains inactive.

Adjusting the following distance

Pressing switch 6 multiple times adjusts the following distance.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (3/8)

Driving

Once a cruising speed is memorised and the cruise control function is active, you may lift your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If a following distance is stored and a vehicle travelling slower than yours is detected by the system in your lane, your vehicle will brake (with the brake lights on) and adapt its speed to that of the vehicle in front, respecting the following distance selected previously.

Overtaking

If your speed is lower than the cruise control and you wish to perform an overtaking manoeuvre, activating the direction indicator will provide acceleration enabling the overtaking manoeuvre.

Please note that you must keep your feet close to the pedals in order to react in an emergency.

Adjusting the cruising speed

The cruising speed can be changed by pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:

- side a (+) to increase the speed;

- side b (-) to reduce the speed.

Varying the following distance

You can vary the following distance from the vehicle in front at any time by pressing switch 6 repeatedly.

Horizontal following bars will be displayed on the instrument panel, indicating the following distance selected:

- one bar for a short distance (corresponding to a following time of around one second);

- two bars for a medium distance;

- three bars for a long distance (corresponding to a following time of around two seconds).

Choosing the distance should depend on the traffic, the laws in your country, and on the weather conditions.

If a vehicle is detected by the system in your lane, an outline A of a vehicle will appear above the following bars.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (4/8)

Exceeding the cruising speed

The cruising speed may be exceeded at any time by depressing the accelerator pedal.

When exceeding this speed, the cruising speed and the following bars are shown in red, and the cruising speed flashes on the instrument panel: the distance control function is no longer active.

Then, release the accelerator: cruise and distance control will automatically reactivate unless the function has been set to standby.

Putting the function on standby

The function is set to standby if:

• you press switch 4 (O);
• you depress the brake pedal;
• you depress the clutch pedal;
• you use the gear lever;
• the engine speed is too low or too high;
• the vehicle speed is lower than 25 mph (40 km/h) or over 105 mph (170 km/h) approximately;
• certain driver correction devices and aids are triggered (ABS, ESC, etc.)

In the latter three cases, the message "Adaptive cruise ct disconnected" is displayed on the instrument panel when the function is set to standby.

Standby is confirmed by the display of the cruising speed in grey and the message "Adaptive cruise ctrl".

Returning to the cruising speed

If a speed is stored, it can be recalled, once you are sure that the road conditions are suitable (traffic, road surface, weather conditions, etc.). Press switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is above around 31 mph (50 km/h).

When the stored speed is recalled, activation of the cruise control is confirmed by the illumination of the cruising speed in green, along with the message "Adaptive cruise ctrl".

When the cruise control is set to standby, pressing switch 2 side a (+) reactivates the cruise control function without taking into account the stored speed – it is the speed at which the vehicle is moving that is taken into account.

Note: if the speed previously stored is much higher than the current speed, the vehicle will accelerate to reach this threshold.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (5/8)

Under certain conditions (coming up behind a vehicle moving more slowly, rapid change of lane of vehicles in front etc.), the system may not have time to respond and may emit a beep alongside the alert B when the situation requires the driver's attention, or the alert C when the situation requires immediate action from the driver.

React accordingly and perform the appropriate manoeuvres.

Please note that you must keep your feet close to the pedals in order to react in an emergency.

Putting the cruise control on standby or switching it off does not cause a rapid reduction in speed: you

must brake by depressing the brake pedal.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (6/8)

Switching off the function

The cruise control function is deactivated when you press switch 5 on the side. In this case, the speed is no longer stored. The green indicator light and the message "Adaptive cruise ctrl" on the instrument panel go out to confirm that the function is deactivated.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating fault the message "Check cruise control" appears on the instrument panel.

There are two possibilities:

- the system is temporarily disrupted (for example: radar camera obscured by dirt, mud, snow etc.). In this case, park the vehicle and switch off the engine. Clean the detection zone of the radar-camera. When you next start the engine, the warning light and the message go out;

- otherwise, this may be caused by another fault. Consult an approved dealer

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (7/8)

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.

The system should under no circumstances be taken to be an obstacle detector or an anti-collision system.

System servicing/repairs

• In the event of an impact, the radar-camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected. Deactivate the function and consult an authorised dealer.
• Any work in the area where the radar-camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be carried out by a qualified professional.

Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.

Deactivating the function

You must disable the function if:

– the brake lights are not functioning;
- the area of the radar-camera has been damaged (on the windscreen side or the interior rear-view mirror side); - the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns);
- traffic is heavy;
– the vehicle is travelling in a tunnel;
– the vehicle is travelling on a windy road;
- the windscreen is cracked or distorted (do not carry out windscreen repairs in this area; have it changed by an Authorised Dealer);
- the vehicle is travelling on a slippery road or in poor weather conditions (fog, snow, rain, side winds etc.). In the event of the system behaving abnormally, deactivate it and consult an authorised dealer.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (8/8)

Limitation of the system operation

– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The radar-camera should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.

• Fixed obstacles (stationary vehicles, traffic jams, toll booths etc.) or objects travelling at low speed or of a small size (motor-bikes, bicycles, pedestrians etc.) may not be detected by the system.
• A vehicle entering the same lane will only be detected once it has entered the detection zone. Sudden or late braking may then take place.
• When entering a bend or curve, the radar-camera may temporarily no longer detect the vehicle in front, and this may lead to acceleration.
• When exiting a curve, the detection of the vehicle in front may be affected or delayed. Sudden or late braking may then take place.
• A slower vehicle travelling in an adjacent lane may be detected and cause a slowing down if one of the two vehicles is travelling too close to the lane of the other.
• A slower vehicle with a wide difference in speed may not be taken into account by the system.
• The system is deactivated below around 25 mph (40 km/h). Drivers must react accordingly.
• Sudden changes in situation are not instantly taken into account by the system. Drivers must remain vigilant at all times and under all circumstances.

System disturbance

Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:

• a complex environment (metal bridge, tunnel etc.) ;
  – poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
  – poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
  – poor contrast between objects;
  – being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.).

Risk of unwanted braking or acceleration.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (1/5)

Operating principle

Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper measure the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.

This measurement is indicated by beeps which become more frequent the closer you come to the obstacle, until they become a continuous beep when the vehicle is approximately 20 to 30 centimetres from the obstacle.

The system detects obstacles to the front, the rear and the sides of the vehicle.

The parking distance control system is only activated when the vehicle is driven at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

The parking distance control system does not take into account towing and load carrying systems etc.

Top-down view of a car with arrows indicating airflow or movement, no text or symbols present

41719

Special features

Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indicated by arrows 1 are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

This function is an additional aid that indicates the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle whilst using sound signals.

Under no circumstances should it replace the driver's care or responsibility whilst reversing.

The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driving: always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving obstacles (such as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind spot when manoeuvring.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (2/5)

Top-down view of two cars inside circular parking spaces, labeled A and B, with lane markings (no text or symbols on the cars themselves)

Note: the display 2 shows the vehicle surroundings and emits beeps.

It is necessary to travel a few metres before the side detection is activated.

If all areas have a grey background, the whole area around the vehicle is being monitored:

• A: analysis of the vehicle surroundings in progress;
• B: analysis of the vehicle surroundings carried out.

Top-down view of a car inside an oval road with lane markings, no text or symbols visible

Operation

Most objects located less near the front, rear and sides of the vehicle are detected.

Depending on the distance of the obstacle, the frequency of the beep will be higher while approaching it, and will become a continuous beep around 20 cm away for obstacles to the sides, and around 30 cm for obstacles to the front or rear. Green, orange and red zones will be displayed on the display C.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (3/5)

D

Top-down view of a car inside an oval road with lane markings, no visible text or symbols

41721

Detection of obstacles to the side

Depending on the direction of the wheels, the system determines the trajectory of the vehicle and notifies the driver of any risk or otherwise of a collision with an obstacle 3 to the side of the vehicle.

If a side obstacle is detected:

• the beeps become faster and then sound continuously as the obstacle gets nearer. Green, orange and red zones will be displayed on the display D ;
• if there is no risk of collision, no beep will sound when approaching the obstacle. Green, orange and red zones will be displayed interspersed on the display D .

Note: in the event of a change in trajectory during a manoeuvre, the risk of collision with an obstacles may be signalled late.

An impact to the under-side of the vehicle while manoeuvring (e.g. striking a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in damage to the vehicle (e.g. deformation of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (4/5)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Adjustment

You can adjust certain settings from the multifunction screen 4. Please see the equipment instructions for further information.

Vehicles fitted with a navigation system

Select "Vehicle", "Parking assistance", "Obstacle detection".

Parking distance control audio volume

Adjust the volume of the parking distance control by pressing + or -.

System sound

Enables the system sound to be chosen.

Deactivating the system sound

Activate or deactivate the parking distance control sound.

Note: if you deactivate the sound, you will no longer be notified with beeps when approaching an obstacle.

Deactivating the system

Activate or deactivate parking distance control.

Vehicles not fitted with a navigation system

Vehicle stationary:

• press and hold the switch 5 OK to access the settings menu;
  – repeatedly press the control 6 up or down until you reach the "Driving assistance" menu;
• press the switch 5 OK;
• repeatedly press the control 6 up or down until you reach the "Parking distance control settings" menu;

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

• press the switch 5 OK;
• using the control 6, select the settings to be changed;
• press the switch 5 OK.

When the vehicle is being driven at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), certain noises (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger the beeping sound of the parking distance control.

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (5/5)

Automatic deactivation of the parking distance control

The system deactivates:

• when the vehicle speed is above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h);
  – depending on the model, when the vehicle is stationary for more than approximately 5 seconds and an obstacle is detected (such as when in a traffic jam, etc.);
• when the vehicle is in neutral for manual gearboxes, or in position N or P for automatic gearboxes.

Operating faults

When the system detects an operating fault, a beep sounds for approximately 3 seconds each time reverse gear is selected and is accompanied by the message "Check parking sensor" on the instrument panel. Consult an approved dealer

REVERSING CAMERA (1/2)

Side view of a silver car with visible rear window and side panel, marked with number 1 (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Operation

When you change to reverse gear, the camera 1 located on the tailgate provides a view of the area behind the vehicle on the multimedia screen 2, accompanied by one or two fixed or moving guide lines 3 and 4.

This system is initially used with the aid of several gauges (mobile for trajectory and fixed for distance). When the red zone is reached, use the bumper image to stop accurately.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Fixed gauge 3

The fixed clearance gauge comprises coloured markers A, B and C, indicating the distance behind the vehicle:

• A (red) approximately 30 centimetres from the vehicle;
• B (yellow) approximately 70 centimetres from the vehicle;
• C (green) approximately 150 centimetres from the vehicle.

This gauge remains fixed and indicates the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are in line with the vehicle.

4 moving guide line:

This is shown in blue on the multifunction screen 2. It indicates the vehicle trajectory according to the position of the steering wheel.

Special feature

Make sure that the camera is not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, condensation etc.).

REVERSING CAMERA (2/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Activating, deactivating the reversing camera

From the multifunction screen 2, select "Vehicle", "Settings", "Parking assistance", then "Rear view camera". Activate or deactivate the reversing camera and confirm your choice.

You can also adjust the camera image settings (brightness, contrast, etc.)

The screen shows a reverse mirror image.

The frames are a representation projected on a flat surface. This information is to not be taken into account when superimposed on a vertical object or an object on the ground.

Objects which appear on the edge of the screen may be deformed.

In very bright light (snow, vehicle in sunshine etc.), the camera vision may be adversely affected.

If the boot is open or poorly closed, the message "Boot open" appears and the camera display disappears.

This function is an additional aid. It cannot, therefore, under any circumstances replace the vigilance or the possibility of the driver.

The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driving: always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving obstacles (such as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind spot when manoeuvring.

ASSISTED PARKING (1/4)

This function assists with parking manoeuvres.

Take your hands off the steering wheel. You only control the pedals and the gear lever.

You can retake control at any time by operating the steering wheel.

2

39527

Switching on

With the vehicle at a standstill or driving at less than approximately 18.6 mph (30 km/h), press switch 1. The warning light integrated on switch 1 lights up and the 2 screen appears on the multifunction screen.

Top-down view of a car with arrows indicating airflow or movement, no text or symbols present

41719

Special features

Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indicated by arrows 3 are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).

ASSISTED PARKING (2/4)

Choice of manoeuvre

The system can perform four types of manoeuvres:

• parallel parking;
  – perpendicular parking;
• angle parking;
• moving out of a parallel parking space.

From the multifunction screen, select the manoeuvre to be performed.

Note: when starting the vehicle, or after having successfully completed parallel parking using the system, the default manoeuvre proposed by the system is assistance in exiting a parallel parking space. In other cases, the default manoeuvre can be set from the multifunction screen.

Operation

Parking

As long as the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (30 km/h), the system looks for available parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Once a space has been found, it is displayed on the multifunction screen, indicated by a small letter "P". So that the vehicle can detect a space, drive slowly, with the indicators activated on the same side as the space, until the message "Stop" is displayed, along with a beep.

The space is then indicated on the multifunction screen by a capital "P".

• Stop the vehicle;
• select reverse gear.

The indicator light lights up on the instrument panel and a beep sounds;

– release the steering wheel;
– follow the system instructions provided on the multifunction screen.

Your speed should not exceed around 4 mph (7 km/h).

Once the warning light 📄 on the instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been completed.

ASSISTED PARKING (3/4)

Exiting a parallel parking space

• Select "Exit parallel parking space" mode;
• activate the direction indicator on the side you wish to go out of;
• press and hold switch 1 (around 2 seconds).

The indicator light lights up on the instrument panel and a beep sounds;

• release the steering wheel;
• go forwards and backwards using the parking distance control system alerts.

Your speed should not exceed around 4 mph (7 km/h).

Once in position to exit the space, the system will notify you of the end of the manoeuvre.

Once the warning light 📞 on the instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been completed.

Suspending the manoeuvre

The manoeuvre is suspended in the following circumstances:

• you take control of the wheel;
• a door or the boot is opened;
  – the vehicle is at a standstill for too long;
• an obstacle in the direction of movement prevents the manoeuvre from being completed;
• the engine will stop.

Once the warning light on the instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been suspended. To resume the manoeuvre, press and hold the system activation switch.

In this case, the reason for suspending the manoeuvre will be displayed on the multifunction screen.

Make sure:

• you have released the steering wheel;
  and
• that all doors and the boot are closed; and
• that no obstacles are in the way of the direction of movement; and
  – that the engine is started.

Cancelling the manoeuvre

The manoeuvre can be stopped in the following cases:

• by pressing the system activation switch;
• the vehicle speed has exceeded 4 mph (7 km/h);
• you have performed more than ten forwards/backwards movements in one manoeuvre;
  – the parking distance control sensors are dirty or blocked;
  – the vehicle wheels have skidded.

Once the warning light 📞 on the instrument panel goes off and a beep sounds, the manoeuvre has been completed.

ASSISTED PARKING (4/4)

This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.

Make sure that the manoeuvre complies with the applicable traffic regulations at your location.

• The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driving: always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving obstacles (such as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind spot when manoeuvring.
• The system cannot detect objects located in the sensor blind spots.
• When manoeuvring, the steering wheel may turn quickly: do not put your hands inside, and make sure that nothing is caught inside.
• Always visually check that the parking space proposed by the system is still available and contains no obstacles.
• The system should only be used when towing a trailer or when there is a towing or load carrying system on the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (1/3)

Selector lever 1

P: park

R: reverse

N: Neutral

D: automatic mode

M: manual mode

+: upper gear

-: lower gear

The gear engaged is displayed on the instrument panel B and on the display A.

Note: press button 2 to go from position D or N to R or P.

Operation

With gear lever 1 in position P, start the engine.

To move out of position P, you must depress the brake pedal before pressing the unlocking button 2.

With your foot on the brake pedal (the warning light 📋 on the display goes out), move the lever out of position P.

Only engage D or R when the vehicle is stopped, with your foot on the brake, the accelerator pedal released and the engine running.

Driving in automatic mode

Put lever 1 into position D.

In most road conditions you will encounter, you will not need to touch your lever again: the gears will change automatically at the right time and at the most suitable engine speed because the automatic system takes into account the vehicle load and road contour and adjusts itself to the particular driving style you have chosen.

Economical driving

When driving, always leave the lever in position D, keeping the accelerator pedal lightly depressed to ensure automatic gear changes at a lower engine speed.

Accelerating and overtaking

Depress the accelerator pedal firmly and fully (so that it goes beyond the kickdown point).

This will enable you to change down to the optimum gear within the engine range.

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (2/3)

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with labeled component (no text or symbols beyond part number)

Driving in manual mode

Move the selector lever 1 to position D, then move the lever to the right into position M.

Shifting the lever repeatedly allows you to change gears manually:

• to move down through the gears, push the lever forwards;
• to move up through the gears, push the lever backwards.

The gear selected is displayed on the instrument panel.

Special cases

In certain driving conditions (resulting in, for example, engine protection, operation of the Electronic Stability Control programme: ESC etc.) the automated system may change the gear automatically.

Likewise, to prevent incorrect manoeuvres, a gear change may be refused by the automatic system: in this case the gear display flashes for a few seconds as a warning.

Check that the indicator light P on the instrument panel is activated before leaving the vehicle.

Risk of loss of immobilisation of the vehicle

Special circumstances

• If the bends and road surface do not allow you to stay in automatic mode (e.g. in the mountains), we recommend that you change to manual mode. This will prevent the automatic gearbox from changing gears repeatedly when climbing, and permit engine braking on long descents.
• In cold weather, start the engine and wait a few seconds before moving the selector lever from position P or N and engaging it in D or R to prevent the engine stalling.

When facing uphill, to remain stopped, do not keep your foot on the accelerator.

Risk of overheating the automatic gearbox.

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (3/3)

Parking the vehicle

When the vehicle is stopped, move the lever to position P while keeping your foot on the brake pedal: the drive wheels are mechanically locked by the driveshaft.

Ensure that the electronic parking brake is engaged.

For safety reasons, do not switch off the ignition before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill.

An impact to the under-side of the vehicle while manoeuvring (e.g. striking a post, raised kerb or

other street furniture) may result in damage to the vehicle (e.g. deformation of an axle).

To avoid any risk of accident, have your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.

Maintenance period

Refer to the maintenance document for your vehicle or consult an Approved Dealer to check whether the automatic gearbox requires scheduled maintenance.

If it does not need to be serviced, there is no need to top up the oil.

Operating faults

- when driving, if the message "Check auto gearbox" appears on the instrument panel, it indicates a failure. Contact your approved Dealer as soon as possible;

- when driving, if the message "Gearbox overheating" appears on the instrument panel, stop as soon as possible to let the gearbox cool down and wait for the message to disappear;

- If a vehicle with an automatic gearbox breaks down, refer to the information on "Towing" in Section 5.

When activated, in the event that the lever is stuck in P, depress the brake paddle. It is possible to free the lever manually. To do this, unclip the base of the lever, then insert a tool (rigid rod) into the slot 3 (located on the right of the lever) and press simultaneously on the button 2 to unlock the lever.

Contact an authorised dealer as soon as possible.

Section 3: Your comfort

Multi-Sense 3.2

Air Vents 3.4

Manual air conditioning, heating system 3.6

Automatic climate control 3.9

Air conditioning: information and advice on use 3.19

Multimedia equipment 3.21

Outside air quality function 3.23

Electric windows 3.24

Fixed glass roof 3.26

Interior lighting 3.27

Sun visor, blinds 3.29

Passenger compartment storage, fittings 3.30

Accessories socket 3.38

Ashtray 3.38

Cigarette lighter 3.38

Rear headrests 3.39

Rear seats 3.40

Luggage compartment. 3.46

Rear parcel shelf 3.47

Luggage cover. 3.48

Luggage compartment storage space and fittings 3.49

Transporting objects in the luggage compartment 3.51

Transporting objects: towbar 3.52

Luggage net. 3.53

Roof bars 3.56

3.1

MULTI-SENSE (1/2)

The Multi-Sense system enables once of five modes to be selected which, depending on the vehicle, affect the drive, the light environment, the comfort and the engine noise:

• modes Comfort, Neutral, Eco and Sport are preset and associated with customisable light environments and engine noise;
• mode Perso is fully customisable.

The drive modes affect the:

– power-assisted steering;
– engine and gearbox responsiveness;
- heating level.

They also affect the:

• passenger compartment and instrument panel lighting;
  – the information on the instrument panel and multimedia screen;
• engine noise;
• massage seat.

Every time it starts, the vehicle can start in the current mode or in Neutralmode.

39522

Mode Comfort

This mode favours smooth steering. The interior environment is softened.

Mode Neutral

Default mode, mode Neutral selects the vehicle factory settings.

Mode Eco

Mode Eco is geared towards saving energy and the environment. The steering is smooth, engine and gearbox management enable fuel consumption to be lowered. Air conditioning is managed to be used only when necessary.

Please refer to the information on "Driving advice, Eco-driving" in Section 2.

In any mode, you can change the colour of the ambient lighting as well as the format of the information displayed on the instrument panel and multimedia screen.

You can also reset to the default settings.

MULTI-SENSE (2/2)

Sport mode

This mode enables an increased responsiveness from the engine and the gearbox. The steering is firmer.

Mode Perso

This mode enables you to manually configure the drive, light environment and, depending on the vehicle, the comfort and engine noise.

Stopping the engine in Sport mode, or Perso mode with engine setting in Sport mode.

Depending on the vehicle, when you restart the vehicle, a message asks you if you wish to keep the engine setting in Sport mode.

Accessing the menu

You can access Multi-Sense, depending on the vehicle:

• from the multimedia screen 1. Select menu "Vehicle" then "Multi-Sense";
• using switch 2;
• using button Eco 3 which automatically launches Eco mode and opens the "Multi-Sense" menu on the multimedia screen 1 for a few seconds.

AIR VENTS: air outlets (1/2)

41500

AIR VENTS: air outlets (2/2)

Front seats

Direction

Up/down: lower or raise tabs 8.

Air flow

Turn control knob 9.

To fully close, turn beyond the point of resistance.

To remove bad odours from your vehicles, only use the systems designed for this purpose. Consult an approved Dealer.

Do not add anything to the vehicle's ventilation circuit (for example, to remove bad odours).

There is a risk of damage or of fire.

Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

2nd row rear seats

Output/direction

Move the cursor 10:

– downwards to decrease the air flow and direct it downwards;
— upwards to increase the air flow and direct it upwards;
- to the right or left.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (1/3)

The controls

1 Air temperature adjustment/"Clear View" function
2 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen and, depending on the vehicle, the door mirrors.
3 Air conditioning.
4 Air recirculation.
5 Adjusting air distribution in the passenger compartment.
6 Adjusting the ventilation fan speed.
7 Adjusting the ventilation speed and stopping the system.

Indicators

The following indicators are displayed on the multimedia screen A:

8 Air temperature.
9 Active mode.
10 Fan speed.
11 Distribution of air in the passenger compartment.

Switching air conditioning on or off

The air conditioning is switched on (indicator light on) or off (indicator light off) using the control 3.

The air conditioning system is used for:

– lowering the temperature inside the passenger compartment;
- eliminating condensation more quickly.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (2/3)

Distribution of air in the passenger compartment

There are five air distribution options. Turn control 5 to choose the distribution option.

The air distribution is displayed on the multimedia screen.

The air flow is directed to the windscreen and the front side demisting vents.

The air flow is distributed between all the air vents, the le window demisting vents, the green demisting vents and the s.

The air flow is directed mainly towards the footwells.

The air flow is directed towards the dashboard air vents, the otwells and, depending on the the second row footwells.

All the air flow is directed to the dashboard vents.

Adjusting the air temperature

Turn control 1 to obtain the desired temperature. The more bars are displayed on the multimedia screen, the higher the temperature.

When the air conditioning system is used for long periods, it may begin to feel cold. To increase the temperature, turn control 1 to the right.

Rear screen de-icing/ demisting

With the engine running, press the control 2. The operating tell-tale comes on.

This function permits rapid demisting/de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing of the door mirrors (on equipped vehicles).

To exit this function, press the control 2 again.

Demisting automatically stops.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (3/3)

Clear View function

Press the control 1: the integrated indicator light in the button comes on. This function quickly demists and de-ices the windscreen, the rear screen, the front side windows, and the exterior rear view mirrors (depending on the vehicle). The air conditioning and rear screen de-icing functions must be activated.

Switching the air recirculation on

Press the control 4: the integrated indicator light in the button comes on. Under these conditions, air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recirculated, with no air being taken from outside the vehicle. Air recirculation operates as follows:

• isolating the vehicle from the external atmosphere (driving in polluted areas, etc.);
• lowering the passenger compartment temperature as quickly as possible.

Varying the ventilation speed

You can adjust the fan speed by pressing the controls 6 or 7 to increase or reduce the fan speed.

The system is deactivated (OFF): the ventilation speed is zero (vehicle stationary). You can, however, still feel a slight flow of air when the vehicle is moving.

Stopping the system

To switch off the system, press the control 7 several times until the message "OFF" appears on the multimedia screen.

You may, however, feel a slight flow of air when the vehicle is moving.

Prolonged use of air recirculation can lead to condensation forming on the side windows and windscreen, and discomfort due to the use of non-renewed air in the passenger compartment. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode (external air) as soon as the air recirculation function is no longer required, by pressing the control 4 again.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (1/5)

Controls A

Press zone 14 to access the multifunction screen controls 1. The presence of the controls detailed below will depend on the vehicle model.

2 and 7 Left and right temperature indication adjustment.
3 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen and, depending on the vehicle, the door mirrors.
4, 8, 9 and 10 automatic modes
5 Air recirculation.
6 "Clear View" function.

11 and 18 Ventilation speeds.
12 Passenger compartment air distribution.
13 Right and left temperature display.
14 Zone displaying air conditioning settings.
15 "DUAL" function.
16 "Automatic recirculation" function.
17 Air conditioning.
19 Stopping the system.

Some buttons have a warning light indicating their operative state.

Automatic mode

The automatic climate control system guarantees comfort in the passenger compartment and good visibility (except in the event of extreme conditions), while optimising consumption. The system controls the ventilation speed, air distribution, air recirculation, and starting and stopping the air conditioning and air temperature.

This mode consists of a choice of three programmes:

NORMAL : allows the selected comfort level to be best attained, depending on the exterior conditions. Press button 4 or key 9.

SOFT: reaches the desired comfort level more gently and silently. Press button 8.

FAST: increases the flow of air in the passenger compartment. This mode is recommended in particular to optimise comfort in the rear seats. Press button 10.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (2/5)

Varying the ventilation speed

In automatic mode, the system uses the most suitable amount of air to reach and maintain the desired comfort level.

You can still adjust the ventilation speed by pressing buttons 11 or 18 or by sliding your finger in zone 20.

Temperature adjustment

There are two types of settings:

– uniform passenger compartment setting;
- DUAL function setting to independently adjust the left and right sides.

Uniform passenger compartment setting

Use control 7.

DUAL function setting

Press button 15 to activate. Use control 7 to adjust the left side and control 2 for the right side.

Note: the air conditioning configuration depends on the mode selected in the "Multi-Sense" menu (please refer to the information on "Multi-Sense" in Section 3).

The displayed temperature values show a comfort level.

When starting the engine, increasing or decreasing the value displayed will not allow the comfort level to be reached any more quickly. The system will always optimise the temperature increase or decrease (the ventilation system does not start instantly at maximum speed: it gradually increases). This may take several minutes.

Generally speaking, unless there is a particular reason not to, the dashboard air vents should remain open.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (3/5)

Clear View function

This function quickly demists and de-ices the windscreen, the rear screen, the front side windows, and the door mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It imposes automatic operation of the air conditioning and rear screen de-icing and, depending on the vehicle, the windscreen electric de-icer.

Press button 6 – the integrated indicator light comes on.

Press button 3 to stop the heated rear screen operating, and the integrated indicator goes out.

To adjust the ventilation speed: press buttons 11 or 18 or slide your finger in zone 20.

To exit this function, press either:

• button 4;
• again button 6;
• on button 8, 9 or 10.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (4/5)

Switching air conditioning on or off

In automatic mode, the system switches the air conditioning system on or off, depending on the climate conditions.

Press button 17 to:

• activate the air conditioning (a warning light in zone 14 comes on);
• deactivate the air conditioning (the warning light in zone 14 goes out).

41067

Stopping the system

Press button 19 to activate or deactivate the system (the operating warning light on button 19 notifies you of the system status).

Rear screen de-icing/ demisting

Press button 3 – the integrated indicator light comes on. This function enables rapid demisting or de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing of the door mirrors (on equipped vehicles).

To exit this function, press button 3 again. Demisting automatically stops.

It is preferable to use one of the automatic programmes NORMAL, SOFT or FAST.

In automatic mode (4 warning light is lit), all air conditioning functions are controlled by the system.

You can still change the selection made by the system. In this case, the indicator light for button 4 goes out.

To return to automatic mode, press one of the programmes NORMAL 9, SOFT 8 or FAST10 or the button 4.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (5/5)

Front view of a modern electronic device with control buttons and a screen (no visible text or symbols)

Adjusting the distribution of air in the passenger compartment

Press buttons 12 to select the desired distribution (a warning light is displayed in zone 14):

The air flow is mainly directed to the demisting vents for the een and the side windows.

The air flow is mainly directed to the dashboard air vents.

The air flow is directed mainly towards the footwells.

Air recirculation

This function is managed automatically but you can also activate it manually.

Note:

– during recirculation, air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled, with no air being taken from outside the vehicle;
- air recirculation allows the external atmosphere to be cut off (when driving in polluted areas, etc.) and to cool the passenger compartment temperature more quickly.

Automatic usage

Press button 16 (a warning light comes on in zone 14).

Manual use

Press button 5 to force air recirculation.

Prolonged use of this position may lead to odours, caused by non-renewal of air, and the formation of condensation on the windows.

We advise you to return to automatic mode as soon as air recirculation is no longer needed, by pressing key 16 or button 5 again.

To exit this function, press key 16 or button 5 again.

The demisting/de-icing will still take priority over the air recirculation.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (1/5)

Controls B and C

5 and 11 Left and right temperature indication adjustment.
6 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen and, depending on the vehicle, the door mirrors.
7 Passenger compartment air distribution.
8 "Automatic recirculation" function.
9 Air recirculation.
10 "Clear View" function.
12 and 18 Ventilation speeds.
13 "DUAL" function.
14, 15, and 16 Automatic modes.
17 Air conditioning.

Indicators

The following indicators are displayed on the screen 3:

1 Active mode, ventilation speed and air distribution in the passenger compartment (temporary display after pressing the associated controls).
2 Outside air temperature.
4 Air temperature, left and right.

Some buttons have a warning light indicating their operative state.

Automatic mode

The automatic climate control system guarantees comfort in the passenger compartment and good visibility (except in the event of extreme conditions), while optimising consumption. The system controls the ventilation speed, air distribution, air recirculation, and starting and stopping the air conditioning and air temperature.

This mode consists of a choice of three programmes:

AUTO: allows the selected comfort level to be best attained, depending on the exterior conditions. Press the button 15.

SOFT: reaches the desired comfort level more gently and silently. Press the button 14.

FAST: increases the flow of air in the passenger compartment. This mode is recommended in particular to optimise comfort in the rear seats. Press the button 16.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (2/5)

Varying the ventilation speed

In automatic mode, the system uses the most suitable amount of air to reach and maintain the desired comfort level.

You can still adjust the ventilation speed by pressing buttons 12 or 18 or, depending on the vehicle, by sliding your finger in zone 19.

Temperature adjustment

There are two types of settings:

– uniform passenger compartment setting;
- "DUAL" function setting to independently adjust the left and right sides.

Uniform passenger compartment setting

Use control 11.

"DUAL" function setting

Press button 13 to activate. Use control 11 to adjust the left side and control 5 for the right side.

Note: the air conditioning configuration depends on the mode selected in the "Multi-Sense" menu (please refer to the information on "Multi-Sense" in Section 3).

The displayed temperature values show a comfort level.

When starting the engine, increasing or decreasing the value displayed will not allow the comfort level to be reached any more quickly. The system will always optimise the temperature increase or decrease (the ventilation system does not start instantly at maximum speed: it gradually increases). This may take several minutes.

Generally speaking, unless there is a particular reason not to, the dashboard air vents should remain open.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (3/5)

Clear View function

This function quickly demists and de-ices the windscreen, the rear screen, the front side windows, and the door mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It imposes automatic operation of the air conditioning and rear screen de-icing and, depending on the vehicle, the windscreen electric de-icer.

Press button 10 – the integrated indicator light comes on.

Press button 6 to stop the heated rear screen operating, and the integrated indicator goes out.

To adjust the ventilation speed: press buttons 12 or 18 or slide your finger in zone 19.

To exit this function, press either:

• again button 10;
• one of the buttons 14, 15 or 16.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (4/5)

Switching air conditioning on or off

In automatic mode, the system switches the air conditioning system on or off, depending on the climate conditions.

Press button 17 to:

• activate the air conditioning (a warning light in zone 1 comes on);
• deactivate the air conditioning (the warning light in zone 1 goes out).

Stopping the system

To switch the system off, press button 12 repeatedly until the message OFF appears in zone 1.

Rear screen de-icing/ demisting

Press button 6 – the integrated indicator light comes on. This function enables rapid demisting or de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing of the door mirrors (on equipped vehicles).

To exit this function, press button 6 again. Demisting automatically stops.

It is preferable to use one of the automatic programmes AUTO, SOFT or FAST.

In automatic mode (indicator light on button 14, 15 or 16 lit), all air conditioning functions are controlled by the system.

You can still change the selection made by the system. In this case, the indicator light for button 14, 15 or 16 goes out.

To return to automatic mode, press one of programmes AUTO 15, SOFT 14 or FAST 16.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (5/5)

Adjusting the distribution of air in the passenger compartment

Press buttons 7 to select the desired distribution (a warning light is displayed in zone 1):

The air flow is mainly directed to the demisting vents for the een and the side windows.

The air flow is mainly directed to the dashboard air vents.

The air flow is directed mainly towards the footwells.

Air recirculation

This function is managed automatically but you can also activate it manually.

Note:

– during recirculation, air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled, with no air being taken from outside the vehicle;
- air recirculation allows the external atmosphere to be cut off (when driving in polluted areas, etc.) and to cool the passenger compartment temperature more quickly.

Automatic usage

Press button 8 (a warning light comes on in zone 1).

Manual use

Press button 9 to force air recirculation.

Prolonged use of this position may lead to odours, caused by non-renewal of air, and the formation of condensation on the windows.

We advise you to return to automatic mode as soon as air recirculation is no longer needed, by pressing button 8 or button 9 again.

To exit this function, press button 8 or button 9 again.

The demisting/de-icing will still take priority over the air recirculation.

AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions (1/2)

Advice on use

In some situations (air conditioning off, air recirculation activated, ventilation speed at zero or low etc.), you may notice that condensation starts to form on the windows and windscreen.

If there is condensation, use the "Clear View" function to remove it, then use the air conditioning in automatic mode to stop it forming again.

Vehicles equipped with mode ECO

Once activated, ECO mode may reduce air conditioning performance. Please refer to the information on "Driving advice, Eco-driving" in Section 2.

Do not add anything to the vehicle's ventilation circuit (for example, to remove bad odours).

There is a risk of damage or of fire.

Fuel consumption

You will normally notice an increase in fuel consumption (especially in town) when the air conditioning is operating. For vehicles fitted with air conditioning with no automatic mode, switch off the system when it is not required.

Advice for reducing consumption and helping to preserve the environment

Drive with the air vents open and the windows closed. If the vehicle has been parked in the sun, open the doors for a few moments to let the hot air escape before starting the engine.

Maintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle for the inspection frequency.

Use the air conditioning system regularly, even in cold weather, running it at least once a month for approximately 5 minutes.

Operating faults

As a general rule, contact your approved dealer in the event of an operating fault.

• Reduction in de-icing, demisting or air conditioning performance. This may be caused by the passenger compartment filter cartridge becoming clogged.
• No cold air is being produced. Check that the controls are set correctly and that the fuses are sound. Otherwise, switch off the system.

Presence of water under the vehicle

After prolonged use of the air conditioning system, it is normal for water to be present under the vehicle. This is caused by condensation.

Do not open the refrigerant fluid circuit. The fluid may damage eyes or skin.

AIR CONDITIONING: information and operating instructions (2/2)

Type of refrigerant fluid

Type of oil in the air conditioning circuit

Inflammable product

Consult the driver's handbook

Maintenance

The refrigerant circuit may contain fluorinated greenhouse gases.

Depending on the vehicle, you will find the following information on label A affixed inside the engine compartment.

The presence and location of the information on label A depends on the vehicle.

Do not open the refrigerant circuit. The fluid may damage eyes or skin.

x.xxx kg

Quantity of refrigerant fluid present in the vehicle.

GWP xxxxx

Global Warming Potential (CO2 equivalent).

CO2 eq x.xx t

Quantity in weight and in CO2 equivalent.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (1/2)

Multimedia systems

The location and operation of equipment may vary according to the vehicle.

1 Multimedia touchscreen display;
2 Steering column controls;
3 Steering wheel controls;
4 or 5 Microphone (depending on the vehicle).

Please refer to the multimedia instructions for further information.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Hands-free telephone integrated control

For equipped vehicles, use the steering wheel controls 3.

Using the telephone

We remind you of the need to conform to the legislation in force concerning the use

of such equipment.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the rearview mirror and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (2/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Multimedia sockets 6

You can use the USB sockets or the card reader SD to access the multimedia content of your accessories and to update the system.

The various sources can be selected from the multimedia screen and from the steering column controls.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, dashboard, and side panel (no visible text or symbols)

The USB sockets can also be used to recharge accessories with a maximum power rating of 12 Watts (5 Volts) per socket, which have been approved by our Technical Department.

The JACK socket enables the radio to be used with an auxiliary cable.

Multimedia sockets 7

USB sockets only allow the recharging of accessories approved by the brand's Technical Services for which the power must not exceed 12 watts (5 volts) per outlet.

The JACK socket enables the radio to be used with an auxiliary cable.

Connect accessories with a maximum power of 12 watts only.

Fire hazard.

OUTSIDE AIR QUALITY FUNCTION

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and digital display (no visible text or symbols)

With the air conditioning switched on, from the multimedia screen 1, select "Menu", "Vehicle", "Take care".

Outside air quality

Air quality is shown on the multimedia screen 1 by visual A or visual B, depending on the vehicle.

Visual A

Air quality is shown by an animation and an explanatory text.

Visual B

Air quality is indicated by a graph. Three colours indicate the air quality level (from the cleanest to the most polluted):

1 (blue)
2 (light grey)
3 (grey)

Please refer to the multimedia instructions for further information.

ELECTRIC WINDOWS (1/2)

These systems operate:

– with the engine running;
– with the ignition off until one of the front doors is opened (limited to approximately 12 minutes).
- before starting, with the front doors closed, after pressing the start button.

Press the window switch down or pull it up to lower or raise the window to the desired height: the rear windows do not open fully.

Interior view of a car showing the door, side mirror, and seat (no text or symbols visible)

From the driver's seat, use switch:

1 for the driver's side;
2 for the front passenger side;
3 and 5 for the rear passenger windows.

From the passenger seats, use switch 6.

Safety of rear occupants

The driver can prevent operation of the rear electric windows by pressing switch 4. A confirmation message is displayed on the instrument panel.

Driver's responsibility

Never leave your vehicle with the RENAULT card or key inside, and never leave a child, adult who is not self-sufficient or a pet, even for a short while. They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine or activating equipment (such as the gear lever or electric windows). If any part of the body becomes trapped, reverse the direction of the window immediately by pressing the relevant switch.

Risk of serious injury.

Avoid resting any objects against a half-open window: there is a risk that the electric window could be damaged.

ELECTRIC WINDOWS (2/2)

One-touch mode

This mode works in addition to the operation of the electric windows described previously.

Briefly press or pull the window switch fully: the window is fully lowered or raised. Pressing the switch again stops the window moving.

Note: if the window detects resistance when closing (e.g. tree branch, etc.), it stops and then lowers again by a few centimetres.

Remote control window closing

(vehicles with 4 one-touch electric windows).

When you lock the doors from the outside, press the locking button on the RENAULTcard twice in quick succession, or on the driver's door in hands-free mode, and all the windows will close automatically (and, depending on the vehicle, the sunroof).

It is recommended that the user only operates the system when the vehicle can be seen clearly and no one is inside.

Operating faults

In case of a fault when closing a window, the system reverts to normal mode: pull the switch concerned up as often as necessary to fully close the window, then hold the switch (still on the closure side) for approximately one second, then lower and raise the window fully to reinitialise the system.

If necessary, contact an approved Dealer.

When closing the windows, ensure that no part of the body (arm, hand, etc.) is protruding from the vehicle.

Risk of serious injury.

FIXED GLASS ROOF

1

2

To slide the curtain 1

With the ignition on:

• full opening: move the mark 3 on the button 2 towards position B. The marks in between correspond to the intermediate positions of the sun-blind.
• to close: move mark 3 on button 2 to position 0.

Special features

If the fixed sunroof blind detects resistance when closing (arm etc.), it stops and then moves back several centimetres.

Operating fault

If the blind will not close, turn switch 2 to position A or B to open the blind, then turn switch 2 to position 0 until the blind is fully closed. If the blockage persists, contact an approved dealer.

Driver's responsibility

Never leave your vehicle with the RENAULT card or key inside, and never leave a child, adult who is not self-sufficient or a pet, even for a short while.

They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine, activating equipment such as the electric windows or by locking the doors.

If something gets trapped, reverse the direction of travel as soon as possible by turning button 2 fully to the right (position B).

Risk of serious injury.

INTERIOR LIGHTING (1/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

Map reading lights

Press switch 1 to get:

• permanent lighting;
• immediate switching off.

Note: for vehicles fitted with a multifunction screen, you can use the multifunction screen to deactivate/activate the courtesy lights which come on when the doors or luggage compartment are opened. To do this, please refer to "Vehicle settings customisation menu" in Section 1.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and rear seats with a numbered component (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a vehicle cabin with labeled components (no readable text or symbols)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Footwell lights

The lights 2 come on when the doors are opened.

When the doors or boot are unlocked and opened, the reading and footwell lights come on temporarily.

INTERIOR LIGHTING (2/2)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a shaft and housing component (no text or symbols visible)

Centre console storage compartment light
The light 3 comes on when the storage compartment is opened.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Glove box light 4
Light 4 comes on when the cover is opened.

Interior view of a car trunk with a numbered component (5) highlighted, showing no visible text or symbols.

Boot lights
Light 5 comes on when the luggage compartment is opened.

SUN VISOR, BLINDS

Interior view of a car showing dashboard, steering wheel, and dashboard panel (no visible text or symbols)

Front sun visor

Lower the sun visor 1 on the wind-screen or unclip it and lower it over the side window.

Vanity mirror

Slide cover 2, depending on the vehicle, and the mirror is lit.

Lateral sun visor

Pull the sun visor upwards using the tab 3 until the hooks 4 engage in their housings (make sure the hooks are properly locked in position).

Child minder mirror

Pull on recess 5 to open it.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (1/8)

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, steering wheel, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Door pockets 1

It can hold a bottle.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Dashboard storage compartment 2

Passenger storage drawer 3

To open, move your fingers into area 4 - it will open by itself. If on a steep slope, assist the drawer opening by pulling the handle 5. It can hold A4 documents. It is ventilated and refrigerated.

Nothing should be placed on the floor area in front of the driver as such objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use.

Ensure that no hard, heavy or pointed objects are placed in the "open" storage compartments in such

a way that they may fall onto passengers during sudden turning or braking.

Maximum load allowed in the passenger storage compartment: 6 kg, evenly distributed.

When driving, ensure that the storage drawer is closed. Risk of injury.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (2/8)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Passenger storage compartment

Pull handle 6 to open it.

The glove box can hold A4-size documents, a large bottle of water, etc.

The storage compartment is ventilated and refrigerated.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with labeled component (no text or symbols beyond number)

Cup holders 7

When turning corners, accelerating or braking, ensure that the receptacle being held by the cups not dislodged.

There is a risk of burning if hot liquid escapes.

Central storage compartment 8

Slide the curtain 9 to open the storage compartment.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (3/8)

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and seatbelt, with a numbered marker indicating '10' (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Central armrest 10

Interior view of a car seat and backrest with labeled component (11), no visible text or symbols beyond the number and number.

Central storage compartment 11
Lift up the armrest 10.

Nothing should be placed on the floor area in front of the driver as such objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (4/8)

Interior view of a car seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Centre console 12

To move the centre console forward or backward (movement B), press the button 13 and slide the console. Once in position, release the button and check that it is correctly locked.

Interior view of a car seatbelt and dashboard with labeled parts (12 and B), no visible text or symbols beyond labels

In cases of intensive use, a protective system will prevent it from operating for a few minutes.

In any case, the load must not exceed 6 kg.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and seatbelt with a numbered component (13), no visible text or symbols.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (5/8)

Storage compartment 14

Cup holders 15

This can be used for storing a mobile ashtray, cup holder, etc.

Interior view of a car showing the door, seatbelt, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Front and rear underfloor storage 16

These compartments can hold road maps, manuals, cloths, etc.

Nothing should be placed on the floor area in front of the driver as such objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (6/8)

Interior view of a car seatbelt with numbered component (17), no visible text or symbols

Lower armrest 17.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car intake port with a numbered marker (18) and no visible text or symbols.

Cup holders 18Rear armrest with cup holder

When turning corners, accelerating or braking, ensure that the receptacle being held by the cups not dislodged.

There is a risk of burning if hot liquid escapes.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (7/8)

Interior view of a car showing the door, seats, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Rear door storage compartment 19

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and seatbelt with a numbered label (20) pointing to the lower side of the seatbelt.

Storage drawer 20 under the centre console

Interior view of a car showing two seats with labeled parts (21 and 41540), no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

Front seat storage pockets 21

Nothing should be placed on the floor area in front of the driver as such objects may slide under the pedal

during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use.

Ensure that no hard, heavy or pointed objects are placed in the "open" storage compartments in such

a way that they may fall onto passengers during sudden turning or braking.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (8/8)

Rear parcel shelf 22

Retaining straps 23

They can be used, for example, to retain a multimedia tablet etc.

For a multimedia tablet

Attach the upper section of the parcel shelf using the straps 23 and place the lower section in one of the housings 24.

Grab handle 25

This offers support and can be held when the vehicle is being driven.

Do not use it for getting into or out of the vehicle.

Clothes hooks 26

ASHTRAY, CIGAR LIGHTER, ACCESSORIES SOCKET

Cigarette lighter 1

With the ignition on, push in cigar lighter 1. It will spring back with a click when it is ready. Pull it out to use. After use, replace it without pushing it all the way in.

Ashtray location 2

If your vehicle is not fitted with cigar lighter and an ashtray, these can be obtained from an authorised dealer.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and seatbelt, with a numbered annotation pointing to the seat (no readable text or symbols)

Accessories sockets

You can use the one of the sockets 1 or 3. They are provided for connecting accessories approved by our Technical Department.

Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 watts (12 V) only.

When several accessory sockets are used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed 180 watts.

Fire hazard.

Close-up of a car interior panel with a numbered component (3) pointing to a button, no visible text or symbols beyond the number and label.

REAR HEADRESTS

Position for use

Lift the headrest fully until it locks.

To remove the headrest

Lower the seatback slightly, press the tab 1 and remove the headrest.

To refit the headrest

Insert the headrest rods into the sleeves, and lower the headrest until it locks.

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

To adjust the angle of the headrest

Depending on the vehicle, move section A towards or away from you to the required position.

To adjust side supports

Depending on the vehicle, sections B can be adjusted independently to the desired position.

Storage position 2 for the headrest

Press tab 1 and lower the headrest completely.

When the headrest is set at the lowest position, this is for storage only. It should not be in this position when a seat is occupied.

The headrest is a safety component; check that it is fitted and in the correct position. The top of the head-

rest should be as close as possible to the top of the head.

REAR SEATS (1/6)

Interior view of a car showing seat, rear seats, and side panel (no visible text or symbols)

To move the seats forwards or backwards

Lift lever 1 to unlock the seat. Once in the desired position, release the lever and check that the seat is correctly locked.

To tilt the seatback

Move the seat forwards if necessary. Lift handle 2 and tilt the seatback to the desired position.

Release the handle 2 and ensure that the seatback is fully locked into position.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

To fold down the seatback (flat-floor position)

Lower the headrest 3 and lift the handle 2 to fold down the seat. Make sure the seat is correctly locked in position.

Note: before folding down the seat-back, check that no device is plugged into the sockets 4.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and dashboard with a labeled component (no text or symbols visible)

To raise the seatback

Be sure to position the seat belt correctly, hold the seatback, lift and ensure that it is correctly locked.

When moving the rear seats, ensure that nothing obstructs the anchorage points (passenger's arm or et, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).

REAR SEATS (2/6)

To access the third row rear seats

• Lift the handle 5;
• Hold the seatback and lower it at the front until it locks;
• sit in the third row rear seat;
• hold the second row seatback and fold it down;
• Make sure the seat is correctly locked in position.

To unfold a seat in the third row

• Access the third row seats;
• place seat belt in hook 6 to avoid damaging it;
• Pull the strap 7 to lift the seatback. Check that the bonnet is correctly locked.

Before moving a second row seat forwards, ensure that the seat is not in the flat-floor position.

When refitting the seat-back, make sure it is correctly locked in place.

If seat covers are fitted, make sure these do not prevent the seatback latch from locking in. Make sure that the seat belts are positioned correctly. Reposition the headrests.

When moving the rear seats:

– check that no one is near to any of the moving parts;

• check that there is sufficient space around the seat;
• check that nothing is obstructing the section of the boot reserved for storing the seat;

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

REAR SEATS (3/6)

To get out of the third row rear seats

• Lift the lever 8;
  – guide the seat forwards until it locks.

Note: If the lever 8 does not work, pull the emergency exit strap 9.

Using the emergency exit strap 9 causes the second row rear seats to move backwards. During the open-ensure that nothing is ob- g the movement of the seat arts, pets, toys etc.).

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

Risk of injury.

To fold down a third row seat manually

• From the luggage compartment, lower the headrest;
• pull strap 10. Depending on the vehicle, it is located above or below the false floor 11.

REAR SEATS (4/6)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a labeled control panel (12), no visible text or symbols beyond the label.

To automatically fold down the seats (flat position)

The rear seats are electrically unlocked to fold down in order to create a flat floor.

There are two ways to manoeuvre the seats:

– from the boot using control 12;

– from the multimedia screen 13.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel with a digital display (no visible text or symbols)

Conditions of use

With the vehicle at a standstill and the rear seat belts unlocked:

• from control 12, with the boot lid open;
• from the multimedia screen 13, with the engine running.

Note: Before performing any unlocking operations to fold down the seats, the trays on the back of the front seats must be folded away.

Disabling the function

• With the engine running, a buckled seat belt prevents the movement of the relevant seat.
• Once the vehicle is moving the two controls are deactivated.

To raise the seats manually

Raise each seat as described on the previous pages.

When moving the rear seats:

– check that no one is near to any of the moving parts;

• check that there is sufficient space around the seat;
• check that nothing is obstructing the section of the boot reserved for storing the seat;

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

REAR SEATS (5/6)

Using control 12

Depending on the vehicle, folding switches:

A the rear left seatback in the second row.
B the rear centre and right-hand seat-backs in the second row.
C the rear right seatback in the third row.
D the rear left seatback in the third row.
E all seats.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the steering wheel with a digital display (no visible text or symbols)

From the multimedia screen 13

With the vehicle at a standstill, select menu "Vehicle", "Seats" then "One-touch folding".

Press on the seat you wish to fold away, or on all seats, then confirm.

For safety reasons, carry out any adjustments when the vehicle is not being driven.

Encountering an obstacle

While being moved, if a seat encounters an obstacle, the movement stops of its own accord. You will then have to manually fold back the seat after removing the obstacle.

Operating fault

If all user conditions have been fulfilled and the folding action still fails to operate, please contact an authorised dealer.

When moving the rear seats, ensure that nothing obstructs the anchorage points (passenger's arm or et, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).

REAR SEATS (6/6)

30913

Silhouette of a person sitting in a seat with a diagonal line indicating a vehicle lane (no text or symbols)

Silhouette of a person sitting in a car seat, no text or symbols present

Use restriction

It is not permitted to drive with a second row rear seatback or seat folded down when there is a passenger occupying a third row rear seat.

TAILGATE

Side view of a modern car with a highlighted rectangular component (no text or symbols visible)

Manual controls

To open

Press button 1 and lift the tailgate.

To close

Lower the boot lid using the handle inside the boot 2 to assist you.

3D rendering of a car trunk with open lid and labeled component (2), no visible text or symbols

The attaching of any carrying device (bike rack, luggage box, etc.) resting on the luggage compartment

lid is prohibited. To install a carrying device on your vehicle, contact an Approved Dealer.

Opening the doors manually from the inside

If it is impossible to unlock the tailgate, it can be done manually from inside:

• access the luggage compartment by folding forward the seatback(s) of the rear bench seat;
• insert a pencil or similar object in recess 3 and slide the unit as shown in the illustration;
• push the tailgate to open it.

REAR PARCEL SHELF

Removal

• Unhook the two cords 1.
• Lift the parcel shelf 2 upwards, then pull it towards you.

To refit it, proceed in reverse order to removal.

Interior view of a car showing the trunk opening and lid opening, with no visible text or symbols.

Do not place any heavy or solid objects on the parcel shelf.

These may pose a risk to the vehicle occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER

To remove the flexible section of the luggage cover

Pull handle 1 gently to release the pins from their mounting points located on each side of the boot. Guide the luggage cover 2 onto the roller (movement A).

Do not place any heavy or solid objects on the luggage cover.

These may pose a risk to the vehicle occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

Removing the luggage cover

Slide the button 2 (movement B) and lift the right-hand side of the roller at the same time (movement C).

Then lift the left-hand side of the roller and remove it.

To refit the luggage cover, carry out this procedure in reverse.

Luggage compartment cover storage

Lift up the rear of luggage compartment carpet 4

Remove cover 3 from the side storage compartment then tilt cover 5

Pivot the luggage cover so that the handle 1 is visible and towards the front of the vehicle.

Store the luggage cover with the handle 1 forwards, inserting it one side at a time;

Reposition the cover 5 and the flap 3.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FITTINGS AND STORAGE (1/2)

Mobile floor 1

Depending on the vehicle, the mobile floor is reversible.

Flat position

It allows you to have a flat floor by folding down the backs of the rear bench seats and to compartmentalise the boot into two distinct spaces.

The mobile floor is positioned on the runners (2 and 3).

Maximum load allowed on the mobile floor: 120 kg, evenly distributed.

Intermediate position (depending on vehicle)

In the blocked position, it allows you to access the tools stored under the boot carpet.

• Remove the mobile floor 1 by moving it back (movement A) and pivoting it upwards (movement B);
• place it in the boot, letting it be guided by the runners (2 and 3).

Storage position

This allows for more space to store things in the boot.

• Remove the mobile floor 1;
• place it in the boot under the runners (2 and 3).

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FITTINGS AND STORAGE (2/2)

Close-up of a car's front panel with numbered annotation (4) and part number 41573, no readable text or symbols beyond annotations.

Hook 4

You can use this to secure a bag.

Top-down view of a car trunk with a numbered component (5) and mounting brackets, no visible text or symbols.

Anchorage points

Attachment points 5.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a numbered component labeled '6' (no text or symbols beyond the number)

Side storage compartment 6

Depending on the vehicle, this may be used to hold the tyre inflation kit. Please refer to "Tyre inflation kit" in Section 5.

Always position objects being transported so that the heaviest items are resting against the back of the rear seat.

If your vehicle is not equipped with anchorage points, you can get them from an authorised dealer.

TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE BOOT

Side view illustration of a car with two people inside, showing dashboard and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Always place the objects to be transported so that their largest side rests against the back of the rear seat for normal loads (e.g.: A), or against the back of the front seats B when the rear seatbacks are folded down.

If you have to place objects on the folded seat back, it is vital that you remove the headrests before folding the seat back so that it can be folded as flat as possible against the seat.

Always position the heaviest items directly on the floor. Use the lashing points on the floor of the luggage

compartment, if these are fitted to the vehicle. The luggage should be loaded in such a way that no items will be thrown forward and strike the occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly. Fasten the rear seat belts, even if the seats are not occupied.

TRANSPORTING OBJECTS towbar

Permissible nose weight, maximum permissible towing weight, braked and unbraked: refer to the information on "Weights" in Section 6.

Choice and fitting of towing equipment

Maximum weight of towing equipment: 38 kg

For fitting and conditions of use, refer to the equipment's fitting instructions.

Please keep these instructions with the rest of the vehicle documentation.

Illustration of a snail pulling a tire with a curved hook (no text or symbols)

A: 866 mm (short chassis).

A: 1,023 mm (long chassis).

If the towbar ball obscures the registration plate or the rear fog lights, it should be removed when not in use.

In all cases, comply with local legislation.

LUGGAGE NET (1/3)

Depending on the vehicle, this may be used when transporting animals or luggage to isolate them from the passenger section.

It can be positioned:

– behind the rear seats A;
– behind the front seats B.

The luggage net is de- signed to retain a maximum weight of 10 kg.

Risk of injury.

Fitting the luggage net behind the front seats

Inside the vehicle on each side:

– lower cover 1 to gain access to the anchoring points for the top part of the luggage net;
- insert the top rod of net 2 into the anchoring points;

• attach the two hooks 5 of the straps 3 from the net onto the anchoring points 4;
• adjust the net strap 3 so that it is taut.

Do not install the luggage net in this position when a passenger is occupying a rear seat.

LUGGAGE NET (2/3)

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and window (no visible text or symbols)

Fitting the luggage net behind the rear seats

(behind the second row rear seats)

Inside the vehicle on each side:

• push the second row seats fully forward;
• fit the mobile floor in the storage position (refer to the information on "Boot storage space and fittings" in Section 3) or remove it;

• lift cover 6 to access the luggage net upper mounting rail;
• insert upper rod 7 for the net into the rail;

LUGGAGE NET (3/3)

Top-down view of a car trunk with numbered component (8) and no visible text or symbols

• attach the hook 10 of the luggage strap to the anchor points 8 closest to the position of the mobile floor (please refer to the information in "Passenger Compartment Storage, boot storage", section 3);
• adjust net strap 9 so that it is taut.
• adjust the position of the second row seats: ensure that the seatbacks do not touch the luggage net.

The luggage net is designed to retain a maximum weight of 10 kg.

Risk of injury.

ROOF BARS

Close-up of a car's front bumper with numbered annotations (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols beyond labels.

Accessing the mounting points

Vehicles fitted with longitudinal roof bars

The attachment inserts 2 are located on the longitudinal roof bars 1.

Vehicles not fitted with longitudinal roof bars

Open the doors to access the fixing points 3.

Interior view of a car showing seat, dashboard, and window (no visible text or symbols)

User precautions

Handling the tailgate

Before operating the tailgate, check the objects and/or accessories (bike rack, roof box, etc.) fitted on the roof bars: these must be correctly positioned and secured, and must not prevent the tailgate from operating correctly.

For information on the range of equipment adapted to your vehicle, we advise you to consult an approved Dealer.

Refer to the fitting instructions for information on how to fit roof bars and conditions of use.

Please keep these instructions with the rest of the vehicle documentation.

Maximum permissible load on roof rack: refer to the information on "Weights" in Section 6.

The attaching of any carrying device (bike rack, luggage box, etc.) resting on the luggage compartment

lid is prohibited. To install a carrying device on your vehicle, contact an Approved Dealer.

Section 4: Maintenance

Bonnet 4.2

Engine oil level: general information 4.4

Engine oil level: topping up, filling 4.6

Oil change 4.8

Levels: 4.9

engine coolant 4.9

brake fluid. 4.10

windscreen/headlight washer reservoir 4.11

Filters.... 4.11

12 volt battery 4.12

Tyre pressure. 4.14

Bodywork maintenance 4.16

Interior trim maintenance.... 4.19

4.1

BONNET (1/2)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

To open, pull handle 1, located on the left-hand side of the dashboard.

Unlocking the bonnet catch
To unlock, push tab 3 at the same time as opening the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

Lift the bonnet, guiding it up, and it will rest in position with the help of two struts 2.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Do not press down on the bonnet: there is a risk that the bonnet may accidentally close.

When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in the park position.

Risk of injury.

Please note when working close to the engine that it may be hot. In addition, the engine cooling fan may

start at any moment. The warning light in the engine comment reminds you of this.

Risk of injury.

BONNET (2/2)

Closing the bonnet

Check that nothing has been left in the engine compartment.

To close the bonnet again, hold the bonnet in the middle and lower it to 30 cm above the closed position, then release it. It will latch automatically under its own weight.

After carrying out any work in the engine compartment, check that nothing has been left behind (cloth, tc.).

These may damage the engine or cause a fire.

Ensure that the bonnet is properly locked.

Check that nothing is preventing the catch from lock-

ing (gravel, cloth, etc.).

In the event of even a slight impact involving the radiator grille or bonnet, have the bonnet lock checked by an

authorised dealer as soon as possible.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information (1/2)

It is normal for an engine to use oil for lubrication and cooling of moving parts and it is normal to top up the level between oil changes.

However, contact your approved Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being consumed every 600 miles (1,000 km) after the running in period.

Oil change frequency: check the oil level from time to time and certainly before any long journey to avoid the risk of damaging your engine.

Reading the oil level

The oil level should be read with the vehicle on level ground, after the engine has been switched off for some time.

The dipstick must be used to read the exact oil level and make sure that the maximum level has not been exceeded (risk of engine damage). Refer to the following pages.

The instrument panel display only alerts the driver when the oil level is at its minimum.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information (2/2)

• Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean, lint-free cloth;
• push the dipstick in as far as it will go (for vehicles equipped with a cap-type dipstick C, screw the cap in as far as it will go);
• take out the dipstick again;
• read the level: it should never fall below minimum mark A or exceed maximum mark B.

Once the operation has been completed, ensure that the dipstick is pushed in as far as it will go or that the "cap-type dipstick" is completely screwed in.

Adding engine oil

Use a funnel or protect the filling neck area to avoid engine oil escaping onto a hot part of the engine compartment or a sensitive part (e.g. electrical components).

Fire hazard.

Exceeding the maximum engine oil level

Under no circumstances must the maximum fill level B be exceeded: risk of damage to the engine and catalytic converter.

If the level exceeds the maximum level, do not start your vehicle and contact an authorised dealer.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (1/3)

Topping up/Filling

The vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine should be cold (for instance, before the engine is started up for the first time in the day).

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

• Unscrew cap 1;
• top up the level (as a guide, the capacity between the "MINI" and the "MAXI" reading on the dipstick 2 is between 0.33 and 0.44 gallons (1.5 and 2 litres) depending on the engine);
• wait for approximately 20 minutes to allow the oil to flow into the engine;
• check the level using the dipstick 2 (as described above).

Once the operation has been completed, ensure that the dipstick is pushed in as far as it will go or that the "cap-type dipstick" is completely screwed in.

Do not exceed the "MAXI" level and do not forget to refit the cap 1 and the dipstick 2.

Adding engine oil

Use a funnel or protect the filling neck area to avoid engine oil escaping onto a

hot part of the engine compartment or a sensitive part (e.g. electrical components).

Fire hazard.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (2/3)

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Do not exceed the "MAXI" level and do not forget to refit the cap 1 and the dipstick 2.

Adding engine oil

Use a funnel or protect the filling neck area to avoid engine oil escaping onto a

hot part of the engine compartment or a sensitive part (e.g. electrical components).

Fire hazard.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (3/3)/ OIL CHANGE

Oil change

Service interval: refer to the Maintenance Service Booklet for your vehicle.

Oil change capacity

Please refer to the maintenance document for your vehicle, or contact an authorised dealer.

Always check the engine oil level using the dipstick, as explained previously (it should never fall below the minimum level, or be over the maximum level on the dipstick).

Exceeding the maximum engine oil level

Under no circumstances must the maximum fill level be exceeded: risk of damage to the engine and catalytic converter.

If the oil level exceeds the maximum level, do not start your vehicle and contact an approved Dealer.

Engine oil grade

Refer to the Maintenance Service Booklet for your vehicle.

Consult your approved Dealer at once if you notice an abnormal or repeated drop in any of the fluid levels.

When working in the engine compartment, ensure that the windscreen wiper stalk is in the park position.

Risk of injury.

Please note when working close to the engine that it may be hot. In addition, the engine cooling fan may

start at any moment. The

warning light in the engine compartment reminds you of this.

Risk of injury.

Filling: take care when topping up the oil that no oil drips onto engine components - risk of fire.

Remember to refit the cap securely as there is a risk of fire if oil splashes onto hot engine components.

Never run the engine in an enclosed space as exhaust gases are poisonous.

Engine oil change: if you are changing the oil when the engine is hot, be careful not to scald yourself if the flows.

LEVELS (1/3)

Close-up of a car engine bay with labeled component (1), no visible text or symbols beyond the number and number.

Coolant

With the engine switched off and on level ground, the level when cold must be between the "MINI" and "MAXI" marks on coolant reservoir 1.

Top this level up when cold before it reaches the MIN mark.

Checking intervals

Check the coolant level regularly (very severe damage is likely to be caused to the engine if it runs out of coolant).

If the level needs to be topped up, only use products approved by our Technical Department which ensure:

– protection against freezing;
- anticorrosion protection of the cooling system.

Consult your approved dealer at once if you notice an abnormal or repeated drop in any of the fluid levels.

No operations should be carried out on the cooling circuit when the engine is hot.

Risk of burns.

Replacement intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle.

Please note when working close to the engine that it may be hot. In addition, the engine cooling fan may

start at any moment. The warning light in the engine compartment reminds you of this.

Risk of injury.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

LEVELS (2/3)

Brake fluid

This should be checked frequently, and any time you notice even the slightest loss in braking efficiency.

The level should be read with the engine switched off and on level ground.

Level 2

It is normal for the level to drop as the linings become worn, but it should never drop below the "MINI" warning line.

If you wish to check the disc and drum wear yourself, you should obtain the document explaining the checking procedure from our network or from the manufacturer's website.

Please note when working close to the engine that it may be hot. In addition the engine cooling fan may

start at any moment. The warning light in the engine compartment reminds you of this.

Risk of injury.

Topping up

After any operation on the hydraulic circuit, a specialist must replace the fluid.

Only use fluids approved by our Technical Department (and taken from a sealed container).

Replacement intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

LEVELS (3/3)/FILTERS

Close-up of a mechanical component with numbered annotation (3) and part number 41589, no readable text or symbols beyond annotations.

Windscreen/headlight er reservoir

Topping up

With the engine switched off, open cap 3, fill until you can see the fluid, then refit the cap.

Note: Regularly check the reservoir level by topping up the liquid before taking a trip.

Liquid

Windscreen washer fluid. In winter, use anti-freeze product. Use products recommended by an authorised dealer.

Note: do not use pure water (risk of damage to the priming pump, limescale building up on the pump and the jets).

Jets

To adjust the height of the windscreen washer jets, please consult an authorised dealer.

Filters

The replacement of filter elements (air filter, passenger compartment filter, diesel filter, etc.) is scheduled in the maintenance operations for your vehicle.

Replacement intervals for filter elements: refer to the Maintenance Document for your vehicle.

12 VOLT BATTERY (1/2)

Close-up of a car hood with visible engine and dashboard components (no text or symbols)

Battery 1 does not require any maintenance. You should not open it or add any fluid.

Handle the battery with care as it contains sulphuric acid which must not come into contact with the eyes or skin. If it does, wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. If necessary, consult a doctor.

Ensure that naked flames, red hot objects and sparks do not come into contact with the battery as there is a risk of explosion.

Depending on the vehicle, a system continuously checks the battery charge status. If this decreases, the message "Battery low start engine" is displayed on the instrument panel. In this case, start the engine and the message on the instrument panel will disappear.

The charge status of your battery can decrease especially if you use your vehicle:

• for short journeys;
• for driving in town;
• when the temperature drops;
• after extended use of energy-consuming devices (radio, etc.) with the engine switched off.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Please note when working close to the engine that it may be hot. In addition, the engine cooling fan may

start at any moment. The warning light in the engine comment reminds you of this.

Risk of injury.

12 VOLT BATTERY (2/2)

Label A

Observe the indications on the battery:

• 2 Naked flames and smoking are forbidden;
• 3 eye protection required;
• 4 keep away from children;
• 5 explosive materials;
• 6 refer to the handbook;
• 7 corrosive materials.

Replacing the battery

As this operation is complex, we advise you to contact an approved Dealer.

The battery is a specific type, please ensure it is replaced with the same type. Consult an approved

dealer.

TYRE PRESSURE (1/2)

Interior view of a car door with labeled component (A), showing no visible text or symbols beyond part number 41592 and label A.

Label A

Open the door to read it. Tyre pressures should be checked when the tyres are cold.

If the tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold, increase the pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI). Never deflate a hot tyre.

B: size of the tyres fitted to the vehicle.
C: intended driving speed.
D: recommended pressure for optimising fuel consumption.

NB: driving comfort may be altered.

E: front tyre pressures.
F: rear tyre pressures.
G: tyre pressure for the emergency spare wheel.

Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system

If under-inflated (puncture etc.), the

warning light lights up on the instrument panel; please refer to the information on the "Tyre pressure monitoring system" in Section 2.

Vehicle used fully laden (Maximum Permissible All-up Weight) and towing a trailer

The maximum speed must be limited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar.

Refer to the information on "Weights" in Section 6.

Risk of tyre blowouts.

TYRE PRESSURES (2/2)

Tyre safety and use of snow chains: Refer to the information on "Tyres" in Section 5 for the servicing conditions and, depending on the version, the use of chains.

For your safety, please respect the speed limit.

When they need to be replaced, only tyres of the

same make, size, type and profile should be used on a single axle.

They must: either have a load capacity and speed rating at least equal to those of the original tyres, or conform to those recommended by an authorised dealer.

Failure to heed these instructions could endanger your safety and affect your vehicle's roadworthiness.

Risk of loss of control of the vehicle.

BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (1/3)

A well-maintained vehicle will last longer. It is therefore recommended to maintain the exterior of the vehicle regularly.

Your vehicle has been treated with very effective anti-corrosion products. It is nevertheless subject to various outside influences.

Corrosive agents in the atmosphere

– atmospheric pollution (built-up and industrial areas);
– saline atmospheres (near the sea, particularly in hot weather);
- seasonal and damp weather conditions (e.g. road salt in winter, water from road cleaners, etc.).

Minor impacts

Abrasive action

Dust and sand in the air, mud, road grit thrown up by other vehicles, etc.

You should take a number of minor precautions in order to safeguard your vehicle against such risks.

You should

Wash your car frequently, with the engine off, with cleaning products recommended by the manufacturer (never use abrasive products). Rinse thoroughly beforehand with a jet:

• spots of tree resin and industrial grime;
• mud in the wheel arches and underneath the body which forms damp patches;
• bird droppings, which cause a chemical reaction with the paint that rapidly discolours paintwork and may even cause the paint to peel off;

wash the vehicle immediately to remove these marks since it is impossible to remove them by polishing;

- salt, particularly in the wheel arches and underneath the body after driving in areas where the roads have been gritted.

Remove any plant matter (resin, leaves, etc.) from the vehicle regularly.

Respect local regulations about washing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your vehicle on a public highway).

Observe the vehicle stopping distances when driving on gravelled surfaces to prevent paint damage.

Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas where the paint has been damaged, to prevent corrosion spreading.

Remember to visit the body shop periodically in order to maintain your anti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the Maintenance Document.

If it is necessary to clean mechanical components, hinges, etc., spray them with products approved by our Technical Department to protect them after they have been cleaned.

We have selected special products to care for your vehicle and you can obtain these from the manufacturer's accessory outlets.

BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (2/3)

What you should not do

Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or freezing temperatures.

Do not scrape off mud or dirt without pre-wetting.

Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior.

Allow rust to form following minor impacts.

Do not use solvents not approved by our Technical Department to remove stains as this could damage the paint-work.

Do not drive in snow or muddy conditions without washing the vehicle, particularly under the wheel arches and body.

Degrease or clean using high-pressure cleaning equipment or by spraying on products not approved by our Technical Department:

• mechanical components (e.g.: engine compartment);
• underbody;
• parts with hinges (e.g.: inside the doors);
  – painted plastic external fittings (e.g.: bumpers).

Doing this could give rise to corrosion or operational faults.

BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (3/3)

Vehicles with a matte paint finish

This type of paint requires certain precautions.

You should do the following

Wash the vehicle by hand using plenty of water, using a soft cloth or a gentle sponge.

Do not do the following

Use wax-based products (polishing). Rub too hard.

Wash the vehicle in a roller-type car wash.

Attach stickers to the paintwork (risk of leaving marks).

Wash the vehicle using a high-pressure cleaning device.

Using a roller type car wash

Return the windscreen wiper stalk to the Park position (refer to the information on the "Windscreen washer, wiper" in Section 1). Check the mounting of external accessories, additional lights and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper blades are secured with adhesive tape.

Remove the radio aerial mast if your vehicle is fitted with this equipment.

Remember to remove the tape and refit the antenna after washing.

Cleaning the headlights, sensors and cameras

Use a soft cloth or cotton wool.

If this does not clean them properly, moisten the cloth with soapy water, then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth or cotton wool.

Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth.

Do not use cleaning products containing alcohol or utensils (e.g.: a scraper).

INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (1/2)

A well-maintained vehicle will last longer. It is therefore recommended to maintain the interior of the vehicle regularly.

A stain should always be dealt with swiftly.

Whatever type of stain is on the trim, use cold (or warm) soapy water with natural soap.

Detergents (washing-up liquid, powdered products, alcohol-based products) should not be used.

Use a soft cloth.

Rinse and soak up the excess.

Glass instrument panel

(e.g. instrument panel, clock, exterior temperature display, radio display, etc.)

Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool). If this does not clean them properly, use a soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with another soft damp cloth or cotton wool.

Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth.

Do not use products containing alcohol and/or spray fluids on the area.

Seat belts

These must be kept clean. Use products selected by our Technical Department (Approved outlets) or warm, soapy water and a sponge and wipe with a dry cloth.

Detergents or dyes must not be used under any circumstances.

Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)

Vacuum-clean the textiles regularly.

Liquid stain

Use soapy water.

Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth, rinse and remove the excess.

Solid or pasty stain

Carefully remove the excess solid or pasty material immediately with a spatula (working from the edges to the centre to avoid spreading the stain). Clean as for a liquid stain.

Special instructions for sweets or chewing gum

Put an ice cube on the stain to solidify it, then proceed as for a solid stain.

For further recommendations for maintaining the interior, and/or for any unsatisfactory results, please see an authorised dealer.

INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (2/2)

Removal/replacing removable equipment originally fitted in the vehicle

If you need to remove equipment in order to clean the passenger compartment (for example, mats), always ensure that they are correctly refitted and are the right way around (the driver's mat should be fitted on the driver's side, etc.) and fit them with the components supplied with the equipment (for example, the driver mat should always be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting components).

With the vehicle stationary, always ensure that nothing will impede driving (anything obstructing the pedals, heel wedged by the mat etc.).

You should not:

Position objects such as deodorants, scents etc. near air vents as this could damage your dashboard trim.

Use high-pressure cleaning equipment or sprays inside the passenger compartment:

without careful use, this equipment could impair the correct functioning of the electrical or electronic components in the vehicle, or have other detrimental effects.

Section 5: Practical advice

Puncture/emergency spare wheel.... 5.2

Tyre inflation kit 5.6

Tools 5.10

Wheel trim 5.12

Changing a wheel 5.13

Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter) 5.15

Headlights (changing bulbs) 5.18

Rear lights (changing bulbs) 5.20

Indicator lights (changing bulbs) 5.24

Interior lighting: changing bulbs. 5.25

Fuses.... 5.28

Battery: troubleshooting.... 5.30

RENAULT card: battery 5.32

Radio frequency remote control: batteries. 5.34

Accessories 5.36

Wipers (replacing blades) 5.37

Towing: breakdown 5.39

Towing hitch.... 5.40

Operating faults 5.41

5.1

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (1/4)

In case of puncture

Depending on the vehicle, a tyre inflation kit or emergency spare wheel is provided (refer to the following pages).

Special note

The Tyre Pressure Monitor function does not check the emergency spare wheel (the wheel replaced by the emergency spare wheel disappears from the instrument panel display).

Refer to the information on the "Tyre pressure monitoring system" in Section 2.

If the vehicle is parked on the hard shoulder, you must warn other road users of your vehicle's presence

with a warning triangle or with other devices as per the legislation applying to the country you are in.

If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use.

Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel smaller than the other wheels:

• Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.
• As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, the vehicle's ground clearance is reduced.
• Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel with the same dimensions as the original.
• When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label on the wheel.
• Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and reduce your speed when cornering.
• If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle and check the tyre pressure.

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (2/4)

Emergency spare wheel A

This is located in the luggage compartment:

• open the tailgate;
  – depending on the vehicle, lift up the movable floor and the boot mat 1;
• unscrew central mounting 2;
• for vehicles which are fitted with it, disconnect the connector 3 located under the luggage compartment carpet then remove the audio amplifier. Do not plug in the audio amplifier again without the emergency spare wheel;

- remove the emergency spare wheel;

- store the punctured wheel in the storage bag (refer to the information on "Tools" in section 5) and place it in the luggage compartment.

Emergency spare wheel C

It is located under the vehicle.

From the boot:

• for vehicles fitted with a servo 5, unscrew the three mounting bolts 4 then move the servo to access the cover 7;
• lift cover 7;

• remove blanking cover;
• only use the wheel brace 6 (using a different tool could damage the mechanism) to unroll the retaining cable. Unscrew the nut anticlockwise (movement B), and the wheel will lower to the ground.

Do not touch the exhaust system.

Risk of burns.

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (3/4)

From the exterior of the vehicle, stand the wheel up, pass the cable and the component 8 through the wheel rim and release the wheel.

To put the spare wheel back C

To carry out this operation, the cable must be unwound.

Stand the wheel up with the valve towards you. Thread the cable and the component 8 through the wheel rim. Lie the wheel down with the valve towards the ground.

From the luggage compartment, tighten the nut fully clockwise (the opposite of movement B) in order to wind up the retaining cable, ensuring that the wheel remains horizontal and the cable taut.

Reposition the blanking cover then the cover 7.

For vehicles fitted with a servo, replace the servo 5. Tighten the three screws 4.

As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, when you place the punctured wheel in the emergency spare wheel bay, the vehicle's ground clearance is reduced. To prevent damage, proceed carefully when driving over raised sections of road and when dismounting ments When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary sure, the driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label the wheel. Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a gel with the same dimensions as the original.

PUNCTURE, EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (4/4)

Emergency spare wheel D

It is located in a wheel carrier underneath the vehicle.

From the boot:

• for vehicles fitted with a servo 5, unscrew the three mounting bolts 4 then move the servo to access the cover 7;
• lift cover 7;
• remove blanking cover;

• only use the wheel brace 6 (using a different tool could damage the mechanism) to unlock and lower the wheel carrier D. Unscrew the nut anticlockwise (movement B) - the wheel carrier drops;
• under the vehicle, lift then push (movement E) the handle 9 to lower the wheel carrier on the ground;
• pull the wheel D towards you, a plastic guide located under the wheel makes it easy to move;
• remove the plastic guide from the wheel before fitting it to the vehicle.

To refit the wheel carrier:

• use the wheelbrace 6 to screw fully the nut clockwise (reverse movement B);
• make sure you lock the wheel carrier in place;
• refit the blanking cover, then the cover 7.

Make sure that the wheel carrier is always locked, with or without the emergency spare wheel inside.

There is a risk of accidents.

When the emergency spare wheel is located underneath the vehicle, it is vital to take the emergency spare wheel

out before lifting the vehicle.

Risk of injury.

TYRE INFLATION KIT (1/4)

32788

Close-up of a car tire with labeled points A and B, showing tread pattern and wheel rim (no text or symbols beyond labels)

The kit repairs tyres when tread A has been damaged by objects smaller than 4 mm. It cannot repair

all types of puncture, such as cuts larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre sidewall B.

Ensure also that the wheel rim is in good condition.

Do not pull out the foreign body causing the puncture if it is still in the tyre.

Do not attempt to use the inflation kit if the tyre has been damaged as a result of driving with a puncture.

You should therefore carefully check the condition of the tyre sidewalls before any operation.

Driving with underinflated, flat or punctured tyres can be dangerous and may make the tyre impossible to repair.

This repair is temporary.

A tyre which has been punctured should always be inspected (and repaired, where possible) as soon as possible by a specialist.

When taking a tyre which has been repaired using this kit to be replaced, you must inform the specialist.

When driving, vibration may be felt due to the presence of the repair product injected into the tyre.

The kit is only approved for inflating the tyres of the vehicle originally equipped with the kit.

It must never be used to inflate the tyres of another vehicle, or any other inflatable object (rubber ring, rubber boat, etc.).

Avoid spillage on skin when handling the repair product bottle. If droplets do leak out, rinse them off with plenty of water.

Keep the repair kit away from children.

Do not dispose of the empty bottle in the countryside. Return it to your approved dealer or to a recycling organisation.

The bottle has a limited service life which is indicated on its label. Check the expiry date.

Contact an approved dealer to replace the inflation tube and repair product bottle.

TYRE INFLATION KIT (2/4)

In the event of a puncture and depending on the vehicle, use the kit located in the storage compartment C or under the luggage compartment carpet D or under the rear passenger foot flap E.

Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system

If under-inflated (puncture etc.), the

warning light lights up on the instrument panel; please refer to the information on the "Tyre pressure monitoring system" in Section 2.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and side panel, with no visible text or symbols.

Before using the kit, park the vehicle at a sufficient distance from traffic, switch on the hazard warning supply the parking brake, askengers to leave the vehicle up them away from traffic.

If the vehicle is parked on the hard shoulder, you must warn other road users of your vehicle's presence warning triangle or with other as per the legislation apply-the country you are in.

TYRE INFLATION KIT (3/4)

Engine running, handbrake applied:

• Disconnect any accessories from the vehicle's accessories sockets;
  – refer to the information on the inflation kit compressor located in the boot of the vehicle and follow the instructions;
• inflate the tyre to the recommended pressure (please refer to the information in the section on "Tyre pressures");
• after a maximum of 15 minutes, stop inflating and read the pressure (on pressure gauge 1).

Note: while the bottle is emptying (approximately 30 seconds), the pressure gauge 1 will briefly indicate a pressure of up to 6 bar, then the pressure drops.

- Adjust the pressure: to increase it, continue inflation with the kit. To reduce it, press the button 2.

If the recommended pressure of 1.8 bar cannot be achieved after 15 minutes, repair is impossible. Do not drive the vehicle. Consult an authorised dealer.

Once the tyre is correctly inflated, remove the kit: unscrew the inflation adapter slowly from the container 3 to prevent any product spatter and store the container in plastic packaging to prevent product leaks.

• Affix the driving recommendation label (located under the container) to the dashboard where the driver can see it.

• Put the kit away.

• At the end of this initial inflation operation, air will still escape from the tyre. You must drive a short distance in order to seal the hole.

• Start immediately and drive at a speed of 12.4 to 37.2mph (20 to 60~km / h ) in order to distribute the product evenly in the tyre; after driving a distance of 1.86 miles (3km) , stop and check the pressure.
• If the pressure is higher than 1.3 bar but lower than the recommended pressure (refer to the label affixed to the edge of the driver's door), adjust it. Otherwise, contact an approved dealer: the tyre cannot be repaired.

Nothing should be placed around the driver's feet as such objects may slide under the pedals during

sudden braking manoeuvres and obstruct their use.

TYRE INFLATION KIT (4/4)

Precautions when using the kit

The kit should not be operated for more than 15 consecutive minutes.

The container must be replaced after the first use even if liquid remains inside.

Following repair with the kit, do not travel further than 120 miles (200 km). In addition, reduce your speed and

under no circumstances exceed 48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker, which you must affix in a prominent position on the dashboard, reminds you of this.

Depending on the country or local legislation, a tyre repaired with the inflation kit may need to be replaced.

Please be aware that a poorly tightened or missing valve cap can make the tyres less airtight and may pressure loss.

Always use valve caps identical to those fitted originally and tighten them fully.

TOOLS (1/2)

The presence of the tools depends on the vehicle.

Jack 1

Fold it correctly before refitting it in its housing (ensure that the wheelbrace is correctly positioned 2).

Hubcap tool 3

This is used to remove the wheel trims.

Screw guide 4

For tightening/loosening wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with alloy wheels

Towing hitch 5

Refer to the information on "Towing" in Section 5.

Wheelbrace 6

Locks or unlocks the wheel bolts and towing eye 5.

Storage bag

This allows you to store a punctured wheel in the boot.

Do not leave the tools un- secured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking. After use,

check that all the tools are correctly clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: risk of injury.

If wheel bolts are supplied in the tool kit, you must use these bolts, and only these, for the emergency spare wheel: refer to the label affixed to the emergency spare wheel.

The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no circumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs underneath the vehicle or to gain access to the underside of the vehicle.

TOOLS (2/2)

5-seater version

Depending on the vehicle, the bag 7 containing the tools is located under the luggage compartment carpet A or under the rear passenger foot flap B. Bag 7 is held in place by a strap 8.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, side seats, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

After use, regarding the locations A and C, reposition the pocket 7 against the panel and tighten the strap 8 by pulling on its free end towards the vehicle interior.

7-seater version

Lift the right rear third row seat C, loosen the strap 8 and remove the bag 7 containing the tools.

To put it back, fold the jack fully, then store it together with the other tools in the tool bag. Reposition the bag containing the tools into its housing. Check that the assembly is correctly positioned (to avoid noise).

WHEEL TRIM

Wheel trim

Remove it using the hubcap tool 3 by connecting the hook in the recess provided next to the valve 1 (to attach the metal clip).

Note: if you are using anti-theft bolts, refer to the information on "Changing a wheel".

To refit it, align it with the valve 1 and the wheel bolts 2. Push in the centre of the wheel trim to clip the centre section around the wheel bolts. Push in the retaining hooks located around the edge of the trim. Firmly push in the centre of the wheel trim again to ensure that the central clips locate correctly above the heads of the wheel bolts.

Note: if your vehicle is fitted with anti-theft bolts, always fix them in place of one of the wheel bolts 2.

CHANGING A WHEEL (1/2)

Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Keep the vehicle away from traffic and on a level surface

where it will not slip.

Apply the parking brake and engage a gear (first or reverse, or P for automatic transmissions).

Ask all the passengers to leave the vehicle and keep them away from traffic.

Vehicles equipped with a jack and wheelbrace

If necessary, remove the wheel trim.

Use the wheelbrace 3 to slacken off the wheel bolts. Position it so as to be able to push from above.

If the vehicle is not equipped with a jack or wheelbrace, you can obtain these from your authorised dealer.

If the vehicle is parked on the hard shoulder, you must warn other road users of your vehicle's presence

with a warning triangle or with other devices as per the legislation applying to the country you are in.

Offer up the jack 1 horizontally; the jack head must be lined up with the sill, closest to the wheel concerned, as shown by arrow 2.

Start cranking the jack up by hand to align the base plate (which should be pushed slightly under the vehicle).

Turn the wheelbrace until the wheel lifts off the ground.

When the emergency spare wheel is located underneath the vehicle, it is vital to take the emergency spare wheel

out before lifting the vehicle.

Risk of injury.

CHANGING A WHEEL (2/2)

Undo the bolts and take off the wheel.

Fit the emergency spare wheel onto the hub and rotate it until the mounting holes in the wheel coincide with those of the hub.

Tighten the bolts, checking that the wheel is correctly positioned on its hub and unscrew the jack.

With the wheel on the ground, tighten the bolts fully and have the tightness of the bolts checked and the emergency spare wheel pressure checked as soon as possible.

Anti-theft bolt

If you use anti-theft bolts, fit these nearest the valve (wheel embellisher may not be able to fit).

If you have a puncture, replace the wheel as soon as possible.

A tyre which has been punctured should always be inspected (and repaired, where possible) by a specialist.

TYRES (1/3)

The tyres are the only contact between the vehicle and the road, so it is essential to keep them in good condition.

You must make sure that your tyres conform to local road traffic regulations.

Maintaining the tyres

The tyres must be in good condition and the tread form must have sufficient depth; tyres approved by our Technical Department have tread wear indicators 1 which are indicators moulded into the tread at several points.

When the tread has worn down to the wear warning strips, these strips will become visible 2: it is then necessary to replace your tyres because the tread rubber is now only 1.6 mm deep at most, resulting in poor road holding on wet roads.

An overloaded vehicle, long journeys by motorway, particularly in very hot weather, or continual driving on poorly surfaced minor roads will lead to more rapid tyre wear and affect safety.

Incidents which occur when driving, such as striking the kerb, may damage the tyres and wheel rims, and could

also lead to misalignment of the front or rear axle geometry. In this case, have the condition of these checked by an approved dealer.

TYRES (2/3)

Tyre pressures

Adhere to the tyre pressures (including the emergency spare wheel). The tyre pressures should be checked at least once a month and additionally before any long journey (refer to the label affixed to the edge of the driver's door).

Incorrect tyre pressures

lead to abnormal tyre wear and unusually hot running.

These are factors which

may seriously affect safety and lead to:

– poor road holding,
– risk of bursting or tread separation.

The pressure depends on the load and the speed of use. Adjust the pressure according to the conditions of use (refer to the label affixed to the edge of the driver's door).

The pressures should be checked cold: ignore higher pressures which may be reached in hot weather or following a high speed journey.

If the tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold, increase the pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).

Never deflate a hot tyre.

Special note

Depending on the vehicle, there may be an adapter which needs to be positioned on the valve before air is added.

Please be aware that a poorly tightened or missing valve cap can make the tyres less airtight and lead sure loss.

Always use valve caps identical to those fitted originally and tighten them fully.

Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system

In cases of under-inflation (puncture,

low pressure, etc.), warning light lights up on the instrument panel. Please refer to the information on the "Tyre pressure monitoring system" in Section 2.

Emergency spare wheel

Refer to the information on "Puncture" and "Changing a wheel" in Section 5.

Changing a wheel

As the tyre pressure monitor may take several minutes to correctly determine

the positions of the wheels and the pressure values after driving, check the tyre pressures following any operation.

TYRES (3/3)

Fitting new tyres

For your safety, please respect the speed limit.

When they need to be re-

placed, only tyres of the same make, size, type and profile should be used on a single axle.

They must either have a load capacity and speed rating at least equal to those of the original tyres, or be recommended by an authorised dealer.

Failure to heed these instructions could endanger your safety and affect your vehicle's roadworthiness.

Risk of loss of control of the vehicle.

Use in winter

Chains

For safety reasons, fitting snow chains to the rear axle is strictly forbidden.

Chains cannot be fitted to tyres which are larger than those originally fitted to the vehicle.

Snow or Winter tyres

We would recommend that these be fitted to all four wheels to ensure that your vehicle retains maximum adhesion.

Warning: These tyres sometimes have a specific direction of rotation and a maximum speed index which may be lower than the maximum speed of your vehicle.

Snow chains may only be fitted to tyres of the same size as those originally fitted to your vehicle.

Studded tyres

This type of equipment may only be used for a limited period and as laid down by local legislation. It is necessary to observe the speed specified by current legislation.

These tyres must, at a minimum, be fitted to the two front wheels.

In all cases, we would recommend that you contact an approved Dealer who will be able to advise you on the choice of equipment which is most suitable for your vehicle.

HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/2)

3D cutaway view of a mechanical component with labeled parts (1 and 41728), showing internal structure without any readable text or symbols.

Direction indicator lights

Turn bulb holder 1 a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb.

Bulb type: PY21W.

Once the bulb has been replaced, check that it is properly secured.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Halogen dipped beam headlight

To change the bulb:

• remove cover A;
• turn the bulb holder a quarter turn 2;
• remove the bulb.

Bulb type: H7.

The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.

Risk of injury.

Halogen main beam headlight

To change the bulb:

• remove cover B;
• turn the bulb holder a quarter turn 3;
• remove the bulb.

Bulb type: H7.

It is essential to use anti-U.V. 55W bulbs so as not to damage the plastic on the headlights.

Do not touch the bulb glass. Hold it by its base.

When the bulb has been changed, make sure you refit the cover correctly.

FRONT HEADLIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (2/2)

LED dipped beam/main beam headlights 5

Please see an authorised dealer.

Daytime running lights and side lights 4

Please see an authorised dealer.

LED front fog lights 6

Please see an authorised dealer.

Halogen front fog lights 6

• Access the bulb holder via the underneath of the vehicle;
• unclip the flap;
  – depending on the vehicle, disconnect the connector;
• turn the bulb holder a quarter turn.

Bulb type: H11 H16 or depending on the vehicle.

To comply with local legislation, or as a precaution, you can obtain an emergency kit containing a set of spare bulbs and fuses from an approved dealer.

The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.

Risk of injury.

Additional lights

If you wish to fit fog lights to your vehicle, please see an authorised dealer.

Please note when working close to the engine that it may be hot. In addition, the engine cooling fan may

start at any moment. The warning light in the engine compartment reminds you of this.

Risk of injury.

Any operation on (or modification to) the electrical system must be performed by an approved dealer

since an incorrect connection might damage the electrical equipment (harness, components and in particular the alternator). In addition, your Dealer has all the parts required for fitting these units.

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (1/5)

Direction indicator lights/brake and side lights

Short chassis version

Open the luggage compartment, remove the cover 1 to access the screw 2 and undo it.

Remove the rear lights unit.

Unclip the bulb holder a quarter of a turn.

Replace the bulb.

Direction indicator light 3

Bulb type: PY21W.

Brake light 4

Bulb type: P21W.

Refitting

To refit, proceed in the reverse order, taking care not to damage the wiring.

The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.

Risk of injury.

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (2/5)

Direction indicator lights/brake and side lights (continued)

Long chassis version

Open the luggage compartment lid and remove the bolts 5 using a tool.

The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.

Risk of injury.

Open the luggage compartment, remove the cover 6 to access the screw 7 and undo it.

Remove the rear lights unit.

Unclip the bulb holder a quarter of a turn.

Replace the bulb.

Direction indicator light 8

Bulb type: PY21W.

Brake light 9

Bulb type: P21W.

Refitting

To refit, proceed in the reverse order, taking care not to damage the wiring.

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (3/5)

Close-up of a car's rear door panel with a black tag and numbered marker (10), no visible text or symbols beyond the number.

Reversing lights

From the luggage compartment, unclip the cover 10 on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid.

Close-up of a car's rear window and side door panel, showing a numbered component (11) with no visible text or symbols.

Unclip the bulb holder 11 a quarter of a turn.

Bulb type: W16W.

Refitting

To refit, proceed in the reverse order, taking care not to damage the wiring.

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (4/5)

LED lighting

The lights are equipped with an LED lighting system as soon as the side lights are switched on.

Consult an approved Dealer to replace the LEDs.

This lighting does not replace a faulty side light.

Rear view of a silver SUV (no visible text or symbols)

Fog light 12

Unscrew the flap located under the rear bumper using a flat-blade screw-driver or similar. Access the bulb holder, then unscrew it by turning towards the centre of the vehicle.

Bulb type: P21W.

Front view of a modern SUV (no visible text or symbols)

High level brake light 13

Consult an approved Dealer.

REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (5/5)

Number plate lights 14

Unclip the light 14 by sliding the light to the right (movement A).

Remove the light cover to gain access to the bulb.

Bulb type: festoon type bulb W5W.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the hood and seat, with number 15 pointing to a component (no text or symbols beyond label)

Indicator lights 15

Consult an approved Dealer.

The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.

Risk of injury.

INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (1/3)

Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

Map reading lights 1

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and rear seats with a numbered component (no text or symbols visible)

Ambient lighting

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Interior view of a vehicle cabin with labeled component (1) and page number 41639, showing no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (2/3)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Footwell lights 2

Please consult an authorised dealer.

Interior view of a vehicle's seatbelt mechanism with labeled component (3), no visible text or symbols beyond the number and number.

Centre console storage compartment light 3

Unclip the light 3 by hand by pulling forwards then pull the bulb downwards.

Bulb type: W5W.

INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (3/3)

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Glove box light 4

Using a flat-blade screwdriver or similar, unclip the light 4 by pressing the tab located on one side of the light to access the bulb.

Bulb type: W5W.

Interior view of a car trunk with a numbered component (5) pointing to the side panel, no visible text or symbols beyond the number and label.

Boot lights 5

Using a flat-blade screwdriver or similar, unclip the light 5 by pressing the tab located on one side of the light to access the bulb.

Bulb type: W5W.

The bulbs are under pressure and can break when replaced.

Risk of injury.

FUSES (1/2)

Fuse box

If any electrical component does not work, check the condition of the fuses.

Open flap A. Press the bottom of clip 1 and pull simultaneously on flap A to remove it and access the fuses.

In accordance with local legislation or as a precautionary measure: obtain an emergency kit containing a set of spare bulbs and fuses from an approved Dealer.

Use the fuse allocation label in storage compartment A to identify the fuses.

Certain fuses should only be replaced by a qualified professional. These fuses are not listed on the label.

Only change the fuses represented on the label.

Check the fuse in question and replace it, if necessary, by a fuse of the same rating.

If a fuse is fitted where the rating is too high, it may cause the electrical circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the event of an item of equipment using an excessive amount of current.

Tweezers 2

Remove the fuse using tweezers 2, located underneath the fuses.

To remove the fuse from the tweezers, slide the fuse to the side.

It is not advisable to use the free fuse locations.

FUSES (2/2)

Allocation of fuses

(the presence of certain fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)

Symbol	Allocation Symbol Allocation
	Windscreen washer	SED	Not used
	Third row accessories socket, boot accessories socket		Locking the doors and luggage compartment
	Front cigarette lighter, front and rear second row accessories socket		Towbar socket
	Not used	DIAG	Diagnostic socket, audio alarm
	Heated door mirrors	[4Y8S]	Horn
	Brake lights, passenger compartment central unit		Instrument panel, dashboard control lighting
	Parking brake		Rear electric windows
	Additional servo		Front windscreen wiper
	Radio, multimedia screen, multimedia accessories sockets, parking brake control		Direction indicator lights, hazard warning lights
	Passenger compartment centre unit, rear wiper, rear fog light	###	Rear USB sockets on console

12 VOLT BATTERY: troubleshooting (1/2)

To avoid all risk of sparks:

• Ensure that any consumers (courtesy lights, etc.) are switched off before disconnecting or reconnecting the battery;
• when charging, stop the charger before connecting or disconnecting the battery;
• to avoid creating a short circuit between the terminals, do not place metal objects on the battery;
• always wait at least one minute after the engine has been switched off before disconnecting a battery;
• make sure that you reconnect the battery terminals after refitting.

Before performing any action in the engine compartment, the ignition must be switched off (please see

the information on "Starting, stopping the engine" in Section 2).

Connecting a battery charger

The battery charger must be compatible with a battery with nominal voltage of 12 volts.

Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running. Follow the instructions given by the manufacturer of the battery charger you are using.

Special procedures may be required to charge some batteries. Contact your authorised dealer.

Avoid all risk of sparks which may cause an immediate explosion, and charge the battery in a well ventilated area.

Risk of serious injury.

Handle the battery with care as it contains sulphuric acid, which must not come into contact with eyes or skin. If

it does, wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. If necessary, consult a doctor.

Ensure that naked flames, red hot objects and sparks do not come into contact with the battery as there is a risk of explosion.

Please note when working close to the engine that it may be hot. In addition, the engine cooling fan may

start at any moment. The warning light in the engine compartment reminds you of this.

Risk of injury.

12 VOLT BATTERY: troubleshooting (2/2)

Starting the vehicle using the battery from another vehicle

If you have to use the battery from another vehicle to start, obtain suitable jump leads (with a large cross section) from an approved dealer or, if you already have jump leads, ensure that they are in perfect condition.

The two batteries must have an identical nominal voltage of 12 volts. The battery supplying the current should have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which is at least the same as that of the discharged battery.

Ensure that there is no risk of contact between the two vehicles (risk of short circuiting when the positive terminals are connected) and that the discharged battery is properly connected. Switch off your vehicle ignition.

Start the engine of the vehicle supplying the current and run it at a moderate speed.

Lift the red cover on box 1 located behind the battery.

Connect the positive cable A to support 3 (+) located under the box cover 1, then to terminal 5 (+) of the battery supplying the current.

Connect the negative cable B to the terminal 4 (−) of the battery supplying the current then to the metal cable 2 (−) of the discharged battery.

Start the engine, and as soon as it starts running, disconnect cables A and B in reverse order (2 - 4 - 5 - 3).

Check that there is no contact between leads A and B and that the positive lead A

is not touching any metal parts on the vehicle supplying the current.

Risk of injury and/or damage to the vehicle.

RENAULT CARD: battery (1/2)

Replacing the battery

When the message "Keycard battery low" appears on the instrument panel, replace the battery in the RENAULT card:

– slide the rear casing 1 downwards while pressing on zone A;
- remove the battery cover 2;
- remove the battery by pressing on one side and lifting the other;

Two transparent plastic enclosures with internal cavities, one showing a black hole and the other showing a circular feature (no text or symbols)

- replace it according to the direction and template shown inside the cover.

When refitting, proceed in the reverse order, then press one of the buttons on the card four times, close to the vehicle: the message will disappear.

Check that the cover is clipped shut.

The batteries are available from approved Dealers, and their service life approximately two years. Check that there is no dye on the battery: risk of an incorrect electrical contact.

If they need to be replaced, be sure to use the same or equivalent type of battery (consult an Approved

Dealer).

When replacing: - make sure that the batteries are correctly inserted.

There is a risk of explo-

sion.

- if the flap does not close correctly, do not use and keep out of reach of children.

RENAULT CARD: battery (2/2)

Operating faults

If the battery is too weak to ensure correct operation, you can still start and lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to the information on "Locking/unlocking the doors" in Section 1).

Do not throw away your used batteries; give them to an organisation responsible for collecting and recycling batteries.

Precautions relating to batteries:

- keep (new or used) batter- ut of reach of children;

– not to swallow the batteries.

Risk of chemical burns which may led to death.

- if ingested or inserted into any part of the body, consult a doctor as soon as possible.

RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries (1/2)

Two gray car key holders with labeled pins, shown from front and side views (no text or symbols on the keys themselves)

Replacing the battery

Open the case at slot 1 using a flat-blade screwdriver or similar, and replace the battery 2, observing the polarity shown on the back of the cover.

3D model of a car key with a labeled component (no text or symbols on the main body)

Note: It is not advisable to touch the electronic circuit in the key cover when replacing the battery.

When refitting, ensure that the cover is correctly clipped on and the screw tightened.

If they need to be replaced, be sure to use the same or equivalent type of battery (consult an Approved

Dealer).

The batteries are available from approved Dealers, and their service life approximately two years.

Check that there is no dye on the battery: risk of an incorrect electrical contact.

RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries (2/2)

Operating faults

If the battery is too weak to ensure correct operation, you can still start and lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to the information on "Locking/unlocking the opening elements" in Section 1).

Do not throw away your used batteries; give them to an organisation responsible for collecting and recycling batteries.

Precautions relating to batteries:

- keep (new or used) bats out of reach of children;

– not to swallow the batteries.

Risk of chemical burns which may led to death.

- if ingested or inserted into any part of the body, consult a doctor as soon as possible.

When replacing:

- make sure that the batteries are correctly inserted.

There is a risk of explosion.

- if the flap does not close correctly, do not use and keep out of reach of children.

ACCESSORIES

Electrical and electronic accessories

Before installing this type of accessory (particularly for transmitters/receivers: frequency bandwidth, power level, position of the aerial, etc.), make sure it is compatible with your vehicle. You can get advice from an authorised dealer.

Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 Watts only. Fire hazard. When several accessory sockets are used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed 180 watts.

No work may be carried out on the vehicle's electrical or radio circuits, except by authorised dealers: an incorrectly connected system may result in damage being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to it.

If the vehicle is fitted with any aftermarket electrical equipment, make sure that the installation is correctly protected by a fuse. Establish the rating and position of this fuse.

Using the diagnostic socket

The use of electronic accessories on the diagnostic socket may cause serious disturbance to the vehicle's electronic systems. For your safety we recommend that you use only electronic accessories approved by the manufacturer, consult an Approved Dealer. Serious accident risk.

Use of transmitting/receiving devices (telephones, CB equipment etc.).

Telephones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the electronic systems originally fitted to the vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial. Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.

Fitting aftermarket accessories

If you wish to install accessories on the vehicle: please contact an authorised dealer. Also, to ensure the correct operation of your vehicle, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use only accessories specifically designed for your vehicle, which are the only accessories for which the manufacturer will provide a warranty.

If you are using an anti-theft device, only attach it to the brake pedal.

Obstructions to the driver

On the driver's side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regularly. Do not lay one mat on top of another. There is a risk of wedging the pedals.

WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (1/2)

Windscreen wiper blades 1

With the ignition on and the engine switched off, lower the windscreen wiper stalk fully: the blades stop slightly away from the bonnet.

Lift wiper arm 3, press button 2 to release the blade.

Refitting

Offer up the blade 3 of the wiper arm 1 at an angle of 30^ .

Slide the blade along the arm until it clips on. Check that it is correctly locked in place. Lower the windscreen wiper arm carefully.

With the ignition on, return the windscreen wiper stalk to the stop position. The blade on the driver's side must always be above the passenger blade. If this is not the case, a quick sweep of the windscreen wipers should be performed once the vehicle is travelling at over 4 mph (7 km/h).

Note: before restarting your vehicle, lower the windscreen wiper blades onto the windscreen to avoid any risk of damaging the bonnet or the wipers.

- In frosty weather, make sure that the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (to avoid the risk of the motor heating or damaging the es).

- Check the condition of the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades as soon as they begin to lose efficiency (approximately once a year).

Whilst changing the blade, take care not to drop the arm onto the window after it has been removed as this may break the window.

WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (2/2)

41758

Rear screen wiper blade 4

Stalk in stop position (deactivated):

• lift the wiper arm 5;
• turn the blade horizontally 4 (movement A) until it unclips;
• remove the blade by pulling it.

To refit

To refit the wiper blade, proceed in reverse order to removal. Make sure that the blade is correctly locked in position.

Check the condition of the wiper blades.

• clean the blades, windscreen and rear screen regularly with soapy water;
• do not use them when the wind-screen or rear screen are dry;
  – free them from the windscreen or rear screen when they have not been used for a long time.

Before changing the rear wiper blade, make sure the stalk is in the stop position (deactivated).

Risk of injury.

TOWING: breakdown (1/2)

Before towing, put the gearbox in neutral, unlock the steering column and release the parking brake.

For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, if it is not possible to put the gear lever into position N, please consult an authorised dealer.

Steering column unlocking

Insert the key into the ignition or, depending on the vehicle, with the RENAULT card on you, press the engine start button for approximately 2 seconds.

Reposition the lever to neutral (position N for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox).

The steering column unlocks, the accessory functions are powered: you can use the vehicle's lights (direction indicators, brake lights, etc.). At night the vehicle must have its lights on. Depending on the vehicle, once you have finished towing, press the engine start button twice (risk of running down the battery).

The speed specified by current legislation for towing must always be observed. If your vehicle is the towing vehicle, do not exceed the maximum towing weight for your vehicle (refer to the information on "Weights" in Section 6).

Towing a vehicle with an automatic gearbox

Transport the vehicle on a trailer or tow it with the front wheels off the ground.

In exceptional circumstances, you may tow it with all four wheels on the ground, only in a forward gear, with the gear lever in neutral position N over a maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km) and at a maximum speed of 16 mph (25 km/h).

When activated, in the event that the lever is stuck in P, depress the brake paddle. It is possible to free the lever manually. To do this, unclip the base of the lever, then insert a tool (rigid rod) into the slot 2 (located on the right of the lever) and press simultaneously on the button 1 to unlock the lever.

Contact an authorised dealer as soon as possible.

TOWING : breakdown (2/2)

Only use the front 3 and rear 7 towing points (never use the driveshafts or any other part of the vehicle). These towing points may only be used for pulling. They must never be used for lifting the vehicle directly or indirectly.

Access to towing points

Front towing point

Press zone A and keep depressed while pulling zone B to open flap 4.

Rear towing point

Press zone C and keep depressed while pulling zone D to open flap 6.

Tighten the towing hitch 5 fully: first by hand until it stops then finish by locking it with the wheel brace.

Use the towing hitch 5 only (refer to the information on "Tools" in Section 5).

- Use a rigid towing bar. If a rope or cable is used (where the law allows this), the vehicle being towed be able to brake.

• A vehicle must not be towed if it is not fit to be driven.
• Avoid accelerating or braking suddenly when towing, as this may result in damage being caused to the vehicle.
• In all cases, it is advisable not to exceed 15.5 mph (25 km/h).

When the engine is stopped, steering and braking assistance are not operational.

Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking.

Using the RENAULT card POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The RENAULT card does not lock or unlock the doors.	Card battery is flat. Replace the battery.	You can still lock/unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the information on “Locking/unlocking the doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping the engine” in Section 2).
	Use of appliances operating on the same frequency as the card (mobile phone, etc.).	Stop using the equipment or use the integrated key (refer to the information on “Locking, unlocking the opening elements” in Section 1).
	Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.	Use the key integrated in the card (refer to the information on “Locking, unlocking the opening elements” in Section 1).
	Vehicle battery flat.
	The message “Place card close to START button” appears on the instrument panel.	Hold the start button card close until the instrument panel message stops being displayed, then press the same button within 2 seconds of the message going out.
	The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the card’s locking/unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ignition.

OPERATING FAULTS (2/7)

The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact an approved dealer as soon as possible.

Using the remote control POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTION REQUIRED

The remote control does not lock or unlock the doors.

The remote control battery is flat. Use the emergency key.

Use of appliances operating on the same frequency as the remote control (mobile phone, etc.).

Stop using the devices or use the key.

Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone. Discharged battery.

Replace the battery. You can still lock/unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the information on "Locking/unlocking the doors" in Section 1 and "Starting/Stopping the engine" in Section 2).

The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the key's locking/unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ignition.

OPERATING FAULTS (3/7)

The starter is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTION REQUIRED

The instrument panel indicator lights are weak or fail to light up and the starter does not turn.	Battery terminals not tight, bat-Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or clean them if they terminals disconnected or they are oxidised.oxidised.Discharged battery or not operational.	Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Refer to the paragraph “Battery: troubleshooting” in section 5 or replace the battery if necessary.Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is locked.
	Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
The engine will not start. Starting conditions are not fulfilled.The hands-free RENAULT does not work.	Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2. place the card in the recess provided for this purpose on the centre console.Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2.
With the vehicle stationary, engine cold, the engine’s idle speed is high.	Petrol version, this is not nec-The engine’s idle speed should decrease after about essarily a fault. This may be one minute. Otherwise, this may be caused by another caused by the increase in the fault. Consult an approved dealer.engine temperature.
The engine cannot be switched off. Card not detected. Place the card in the recess provided for this purpose on the centre console. Press and hold the start button.
	Electronic fault. Press the start button 3 times quickly or press and hold.
The steering column remains locked.	Steering wheel locked.	Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine start button or, depending on the vehicle, while turning the key (refer to the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
	Faulty electrical circuit.	Consult an approved dealer.

OPERATING FAULTS (4/7)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Vibrations. Tyres not inflated to correct pressures, incorrectly balanced or damaged.		Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the problem, have them checked by an approved Dealer.
White smoke from the exhaust. In the diesel version, this is not necessarily a fault. Smoke may be caused by particle filter regeneration.		Refer to the information on “Special features of diesel versions” in Section 2.
Smoke under the bonnet.	Short-circuit or cooling system leak.	Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away from the vehicle and contact an approved dealer.
The oil pressure warning light comes on:
while cornering or braking	The level is too low.	Top up the engine oil level (refer to the information on “Engine oil level: topping up/ filling” in Section 4).
is slow to go out or remains lit under acceleration	Loss of oil pressure.	Stop the vehicle and contact an approved Dealer.

OPERATING FAULTS (5/7)

On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Steering becomes heavy. Assistance overheating.		Drive carefully at reduced speed, be aware of the level of force in the steering wheel needed to turn the wheels. Consult an approved dealer
	Fault with the electric assistance motor.
	Fault in the assistance system.
The engine is overheating. The coolant temperature indicator is in the warning zone and warning light STOP comes on.	Engine cooling fan not working. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and contact an approved dealer.
	Coolant leaks. Check the coolant reservoir: it should contain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an authorised dealer as soon as possible.
Coolant boiling in the coolant reservoir.	Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder head gasket.	Stop the engine.Contact an approved dealer.

Radiator: If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant while the engine is very warm. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.

OPERATING FAULTS (6/7)

Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

The wipers do not work. Wiper blades stuck. Free the blades before using the wipers.
	Faulty electrical circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
	Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
The wiper does not stop. Faulty electrical controls. Consult an approved dealer.
Direction indicators flashing more quickly.	Blown bulb. See information on “Headlights: changing bulbs” in section 5.
The direction indicators do not work. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.
	Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.
The lights do not come on or go off.	Faulty electrical circuit or control.	Consult an approved dealer.
	Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer to the information on “Fuses” in section 5.

Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO

Traces of condensation in the head-lights or rear lights.	Traces of condensation may be a natural phenomenon caused by variations in temperature and humidity.In this case, the traces will disappear slowly once the lights are switched on.
The front seat belt reminder light comes on when the seat belts are fastened.	An object is stuck between the floor and the seat and is disrupting the operation of the sensor.	Remove all objects from underneath the front seats.

Section 6: Technical specifications

Vehicle identification plates 6.2

Engine identification plates 6.3

Dimensions 6.5

Engine specifications.... 6.7

Weights 6.10

Towing weights 6.10

Replacement parts and repairs 6.11

Service sheets.... 6.12

Anticorrosion check 6.18

6.1

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATES

Interior view of a car showing the backrest and seat area with labeled point A (no text or symbols beyond label)

Close-up of a car's front dashboard and windshield area, highlighting a component labeled 'B' with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols beyond label)

The information shown on the vehicle identification plate should be quoted on all correspondence or orders.

The presence and location of the information depends on the vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate A

1 Manufacturer name.
2 EC design number or approval number.
3 Identification number.
Depending on the vehicle, this information is also given on marking B.

4 MMAC (Maximum permissible all-up weight).
5 MTR (Gross train weight: vehicle fully loaded, with trailer).
6 MMTA (Maximum Permissible Weight) front axle.
7 MMTA rear axle.
8 Reserved for related or additional entries.
9 Not used.
10 Paint reference (colour code).

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES (1/2)

Please quote the information on the engine plate or label A in all correspondence or orders.

(Location varies depending on engine)

1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine number.

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES (2/2)

Please quote the information on the engine plate or label A in all correspondence or orders.

(Location varies depending on engine)

1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine number.

DIMENSIONS (in metres) (1/2)

Short chassis

1,653*
* Unladen

DIMENSIONS (in metres) (2/2)
Long chassis

1,660*

Front view of a modern sedan car with visible headlights and grille, shown in top and front angles (no text or symbols)

* Unladen

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (1/3)

Versions 1.2 Tce 1.3 Tce 1.5	dCi 1.6 dCi 1.7 dCi
Engine type(see engine plate)	H5F Turbo H5H Turbo K9K R9M R9N
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 197 1 33	3 1 461 1 598	1 749
Type of fuelOctane rating	PetrolIt isessentialthat you use unleaded petrol of the octane rating stated on the label inside the fuel filler flap.Refer to «Fuel tank» in Section 1.		DieselThe label located in the fuel filler flap indicates the authorised fuels.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (2/3)

Versions 1.2 Tce 1.3 Tce 1.5	dCi 1.6 dCi 1.7 dCi
Engine type(see engine plate)	H5F Turbo H5H Turbo K9K R9M R9N
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 197 1 333 1 461 1 598			1 749
Fuel types that meet European standards and are compatible with the engines of vehicles sold in Europe(in any other case, contact an Approved Dealer).		Unleaded petrol compliant with standard EN 228 contains up to 5 % ethanol in volume.			Diesel fuel compliant with standard EN 590 contains up to 7 % fatty acid methyl ester in volume.
		Unleaded petrol compliant with standard EN 228 contains up to 10 % ethanol in volume.			Diesel fuel compliant with standard EN 16734 contains up to 10 % fatty acid methyl ester in volume.
					Diesel fuel compliant with standard EN 15940 contains up to 7% acid methyl ester in volume.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (3/3)

Versions 1.2 TCe 1.3	TCe 1.5 dCi 1.6 dCi 1.7	dCi
Engine type(see engine plate)	H5F Turbo H5H Turbo K9K R9M R9N
Cubic capacity (cc) 1	197 1 333 1 461 1 598 1	749
Spark plugs	Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehicle's engine.The type should be marked on a label affixed inside the engine compartment. If it is not then contact an approved Dealer.Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification may damage the engine.		-

WEIGHTS (in kg)

The weights indicated are for a basic vehicle without options: they may vary depending on your vehicle's equipment. Consult an approved Dealer.

Maximum Permissible All-Up Weight (MMAC)Gross Train Weight (MTR)Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMTA)	Weights are indicated on the vehicle identification plate (refer to the information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)
Braked Trailer Weight*	found by calculating: MTR - MMAC
Unbraked Trailer Weight* 740
Permissible nose weight* 75
Permissible load on the roof with the carrying device 80 (including the carrying device)

\* Towing weight (Towing a caravan, boat, etc.)

Towing is prohibited when the MTR - MMAC calculation is equal to zero, or when the MTR is equal to zero (or is not listed) on the identification plate.

• It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an approved Dealer about any towing equipment.
• For vehicles fitted with a trailer, the total train weight (vehicle + trailer) must never be exceeded. However, for 7-seater vehicles, the following values are tolerated:

– rear axle MMTA exceeded by no more than 15%,

– maximum MMAC exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever is reached first).

In either case, the maximum speed of the vehicle and trailer must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressures must be increased by 0.2 bar (3 PSI).

- The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. You need to reduce the total train weight by 10% at an altitude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.

REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS

Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same level of quality as the parts fitted originally.

If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out within the manufacturer's Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the repair order.

SERVICE SHEETS (1/6)

VIN:

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK*□*See specific page

SERVICE SHEETS (2/6)

VIN: ....

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK*□*See specific page

SERVICE SHEETS (3/6)

VIN:

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK*□*See specific page

SERVICE SHEETS (4/6)

VIN: ....

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK*□*See specific page

SERVICE SHEETS (5/6)

VIN:

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK*□*See specific page

SERVICE SHEETS (6/6)

VIN:

Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK* □*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: StampService □...... □
Anti-corrosion check:OK □ Not OK*□*See specific page

ANTICORROSION CHECK (1/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ....

Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:

ANTICORROSION CHECK (2/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ....

Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:

ANTICORROSION CHECK (3/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ....

Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:

ANTICORROSION CHECK (4/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ....

Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:

ANTICORROSION CHECK (5/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ....

Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:

ANTICORROSION CHECK (6/6)

If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.

VIN: ....

Corrosion repair operation to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:		Stamp
Date of repair:

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (1/6)

A

ABS 2.31 → 2.35

accessories.... 5.36

accessories socket 3.22, 3.38

adaptive cruise control....2.70 → 2.77

additional methods of restraint side protection 1.41

to the rear seat belts 1.34 → 1.40

additional methods of restraint ....1.34 → 1.39, 1.42

additive (reagent)....1.117 → 1.120

adjusting your driving position 1.29

advice on antipollution 2.26

air bag activating the front passenger air bags .... 1.65 deactivating the front passenger air bags .... 1.63

air bag....1.34 → 1.42

air conditioning ....3.6 → 3.13, 3.19 – 3.20

air vents 3.4 - 3.5

anti-corrosion check 6.18 → 6.23

anti-corrosion protection 4.16

anti-lock braking system: ABS 2.31 → 2.35

antipollution advice 2.26

armrest: front 3.33

ashtray 3.38

assisted parking....2.78 → 2.82, 2.85 → 2.88

automatic gearbox (use) 2.89 → 2.91

automatic gearbox selector lever....2.89 → 2.91

B

battery troubleshooting .... 5.30 – 5.31

battery.... 4.12 - 4.13

battery (remote control) 5.34 - 5.35, 5.35

blind spot warning signal 2.51 → 2.54

blind spot: warning signal 2.51 → 2.54

bonnet 4.2-4.3

brake fluid 4.10

bulbs changing ....5.18 → 5.24

C

catalytic converter.... 2.12, 2.14

central door locking ....1.2 - 1.3, 1.5, 1.12 → 1.15, 1.18

changing a bulb 5.18 → 5.24

changing a wheel.... 5.13 - 5.14

changing gear 2.15, 2.89 → 2.91

child minder mirror 3.29

child restraint/seat ....1.43 - 1.44, 1.46 → 1.62

child safety....1.6, 1.43 - 1.44, 1.46 → 1.62, 3.24

child seats....1.43 – 1.44, 1.46 → 1.62

children 1.43 - 1.44, 1.44

children (safety) 1.6, 3.24

cigar lighter 3.38

cleaning: inside the vehicle 4.19 – 4.20

clock 1.94

closing the doors ....1.13 → 1.17

control instruments 1.82 - 1.83

controls 1.66 → 1.69

coolant 4.9

courtesy light 3.27 - 3.28, 5.25 → 5.27

courtesy mirrors 3.29

cruise control 2.63 → 2.69

cruise control-speed limiter....2.63 → 2.69

customised vehicle settings 1.92 - 1.93

customising the vehicle settings 1.92 - 1.93

D

dashboard....1.66 → 1.69

daytime running lights.... 1.101

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (2/6)

deadlocking the doors 1.5, 1.12

demisting

rear screen ....3.6 → 3.8

windscreen 3.6 → 3.8

dimensions 6.5-6.6

dipstick.... 4.6 - 4.7

display 1.70 → 1.81, 3.21

doors....1.16 → 1.18

doors/tailgate 1.4, 1.12

driver assistance..... 2.31 → 2.35, 2.43 → 2.57, 2.60 → 2.88

driver's position 1.66 → 1.75

driving 2.2 → 2.7, 2.12, 2.14 → 2.25, 2.28 → 2.35,

2.63 → 2.82, 2.89 → 2.91

driving aids 2.31 → 2.35, 2.43 → 2.88

driving position

settings 1.29

driving recommendations 2.20 → 2.25

E

ECO driving 2.20 → 2.25

ECO mode 2.23

electric beam height adjustment 1.103

electric windows 3.24 - 3.25

electronic parking brake 2.16 → 2.19

electronic stability control: ESC 2.31 → 2.35

emergency active braking....2.36 → 2.42

emergency brake assist....2.31 → 2.35

emergency braking 2.31 → 2.35

emergency key 1.6 - 1.7

emergency spare wheel ....5.2 → 5.5

engine

technical specifications ....6.7 → 6.9, 6.8 – 6.9, 6.9

engine oil 4.4 → 4.8, 4.7 – 4.8

engine oil level 4.6 → 4.8, 4.7 – 4.8

engine specifications ....6.7 → 6.9, 6.8 – 6.9, 6.9

engine standby 2.8 → 2.11

engine start/stop button 2.5 → 2.7

environment 2.27

ESC: electronic stability control ....2.31 → 2.35

exterior air quality 3.23

external temperature 1.94

F

fatigue detection warning.... 2.58 - 2.59

fatigue detector 2.58 - 2.59

faults

operating faults ....5.41 → 5.47

filling with reagent 1.117 → 1.120

filter

air filter 4.11

diesel filter 4.11

oil filter 4.11

particle filter 2.13

passenger compartment filter 4.11

fittings ....3.30 → 3.37

fixed sunroof 3.26

front passenger air bag deactivation 1.63

front seat

driver's position memory 1.28

front seat adjustment ....1.21 → 1.23

front seats

adjustment 1.21 → 1.23

with electric controls 1.24 - 1.25

with manual controls 1.21

fuel

advice on fuel economy 2.20 → 2.25

capacity 1.114

consumption 2.20 → 2.25

filling 1.114 → 1.116

grade 1.114 → 1.116

fuel consumption 2.20 → 2.25, 3.19

fuel economy 2.20 → 2.25

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (3/6)

fuel level 1.76

fuel repriming 1.115

fuel tank capacity ....1.114 → 1.116

fuel tank capacity 1.114 → 1.116

fuses 5.28 - 5.29

G

gear lever....2.15

grab handle.... 3.33

H

handbrake.... 2.15 - 2.16

«hands-free» card: battery 5.32 – 5.33, 5.33

«hands-free» card: use....1.8 → 1.11

hands-free telephone integrated control 3.21 - 3.22

hazard warning lights signal 1.97 - 1.98

headlight beam adjustment 1.104 - 1.105

headlight flashers 1.97

headlight washer 1.110

headrest.... 3.39

head-up display 1.76 → 1.81

heating and air conditioning system ....3.6 → 3.8, 3.19

heating system ....3.6 → 3.13, 3.19 – 3.20

Hill Start Assist....2.31 → 2.35

horn 1.97

horn:

flash 1.97

sounding the horn 1.97

hubcap tool 5.10 → 5.12

|

ignition switch 2.3

indicators 1.97, 5.18 - 5.19

indicators:

direction indicators 1.97, 5.20

exterior temperature indicator 1.94

instrument panel 1.70 → 1.83

instrument panel 1.70 → 1.91, 1.98

instrument panel messages....1.84 → 1.91

interior trim

maintenance 4.19 - 4.20

Isofix 1.57 → 1.62

J

jack 5.10 → 5.12

K

keys 1.2 → 1.5

L

lane departure warning 2.43 → 2.50

lane keeping: assistance 2.47 → 2.50

levels:

brake fluid 4.10

coolant 4.9

engine oil 4.4 - 4.5

windscreen washer reservoir 4.11

lifting the vehicle

changing a wheel 5.13 - 5.14

lighting:

exterior 1.7, 1.98 → 1.105

instrument panel 1.98

interior 3.27 - 3.28, 5.25 → 5.27

lights

adjustment 1.104 - 1.105

changing bulbs 5.18 - 5.19

front 5.18 - 5.19

lights:

adjusting 1.104 - 1.105

adjustment of headlight beam height 1.104 - 1.105

brake lights 5.20

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (4/6)

dipped beam headlights 1.98, 5.18 - 5.19
direction indicators 1.97, 5.18 → 5.20
electric beam height adjustment 1.104 - 1.105
fog lights 1.103, 5.20
hazard warning 1.97
main beam headlights 1.99, 1.101, 5.18 – 5.19
number plate lights 5.24
reversing lights 5.20
side lights 1.98, 5.20
locking the doors ....1.4, 1.6 → 1.12, 1.16 → 1.18
luggage compartment cover 3.48
luggage retaining net 3.53 → 3.55

M

maintenance 2.26

maintenance:

bodywork 4.16 → 4.18

interior trim 4.19 - 4.20

mechanical 4.2-4.3, 6.12 6.17

manual air conditioning....3.6 → 3.8

map reading lights 3.27 - 3.28

menu for customising the vehicle settings 1.92 - 1.93

methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...1.40 → 1.42

multifunction display 1.76 → 1.81

multifunction screen....1.76 → 1.81

multimedia (equipment) 3.21 - 3.22

multimedia equipment 3.21 - 3.22

Multi-Sense.... 3.2 - 3.3

N

navigation 3.21-3.22

navigation system 3.21-3.22

0

oil change 4.4 - 4.5, 4.8

opening the doors 1.13 → 1.17

operating faults ....5.41 → 5.47
overspeed warning 1.76, 2.60 → 2.62

P

paintwork

maintenance 4.16 → 4.18

parking assistance: assisted parking 2.78 → 2.82, 2.85 → 2.88

parking distance control....2.78 → 2.82

pedestrian detection 2.36 → 2.42

power-assisted steering.... 1.19

puncture....5.2 → 5.5, 5.10 → 5.14

R

radio.... 3.21 – 3.22

radio frequency remote control/key

use 1.2 → 1.4

reagent (tank) 1.117 → 1.120

reagent quality 1.117 → 1.120

reagent tank....1.117 → 1.120

reagent tank cap 1.117 → 1.120

reagent tank capacity 1.117 → 1.120

rear parcel shelf 3.37, 3.47 - 3.48

rear screen de-icing/demisting 3.13

rear seats

functions 3.40 → 3.45

rear view camera 2.83 - 2.84

rear view mirrors 1.95 - 1.96

remote control card: battery.... 5.32 - 5.33, 5.33

remote control card: use 1.10 - 1.11

remote control door locking

batteries 5.34 - 5.35, 5.35

remote control door locking unit ....1.2 → 1.4

RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID) 1.18

RENAULT card

battery 5.32-5.33,5.33

use 1.6 → 1.12

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (5/6)

RENAULT card battery 5.32 - 5.33, 5.33
replacement parts 6.11
reverse gear selecting ....2.15, 2.89 → 2.91
reversing sensor 2.78 → 2.82
roof bars 3.56
roof rack roof bars ...... 3.56 running in ...... 2.2 – 2.3

s

safety distance warning 2.55 → 2.57

safety distances 2.55 → 2.57

SCR: selective catalytic reduction ....1.117 → 1.120

screen fold-away screen 1.78
navigation display 1.77, 3.21 - 3.22
navigation screen 1.77, 3.21 - 3.22

screen wash/wipe 1.112 - 1.113

seat belt pretensioners ....1.34 → 1.39

seat belts ....1.29 → 1.32, 1.34 → 1.39, 1.42

see-me-home lighting 1.102

service sheets....6.12 → 6.17

side indicator lights changing bulbs 5.24

sign detection: overspeed warning ....2.60 → 2.62

signals and lights 1.98 → 1.105

special features of diesel versions.... 2.14

special features of petrol vehicles 2.12

speed limiter 2.63 → 2.65

starting the engine ....2.3 → 2.11

steering wheel adjustment 1.19

Stop & Start 2.8 → 2.11

Stop & Start function....2.8 → 2.11

stopping the engine 2.4

storage compartment....3.30 → 3.37
storage compartments ....3.30 → 3.37, 3.49
sun blinds 3.29
sun visor 3.29
switching on the vehicle ignition 2.3, 2.6

T

tailgate 3.46 - 3.47, 3.49, 3.51

tanks and reservoirs
brake fluid 4.10
coolant 4.9

tanks and reservoirs: windscreen washer 4.11

technical specifications 6.5 → 6.9, 6.8 → 6.11

telephone 3.21-3.22

temperature regulation ....3.9 → 3.13, 3.19 – 3.20

tool kit ....5.10 → 5.12

towing breakdown .... 5.39 – 5.40 towing equipment .... 3.51 – 3.52

towing a caravan 3.51 - 3.52, 6.10

towing equipment fitting 3.51 – 3.52

towing hitch.... 5.39 - 5.40

towing rings 3.51, 3.54

towing weights 6.10

traction control 2.31 → 2.35

transporting children 1.43 - 1.44, 1.46 → 1.62

transporting objects in the luggage compartment .... 3.51 luggage net .... 3.53 → 3.55

trims 5.11

trip computer and warning system...1.70 → 1.75, 1.82 → 1.91

tyre inflation kit....5.6 → 5.9

tyre pressure....2.28 → 2.30, 4.14 – 4.15, 5.16

tyre pressure monitor....2.28 → 2.30

ALPHABETICAL INDEX (6/6)

tyre pressures ....2.28 → 2.30, 4.14 – 4.15, 4.15 tyres ....2.25, 2.28 → 2.30, 4.14 – 4.15, 5.15 → 5.17

U

unlocking the doors ....1.13 → 1.15

V

vehicle detection ....2.36 → 2.42 vehicle identification plates ....6.2 – 6.4, 6.4 ventilation ....3.6 → 3.13, 3.19 – 3.20

W

warning buzzer .... 1.16, 1.97, 1.101 warning lights.... 1.70 → 1.75, 1.82 → 1.91 washing .... 4.16 → 4.18 weights .... 6.10 wheelbrace .... 5.10 → 5.12 wheels (safety) .... 5.15 → 5.17 windscreen de-icing/demisting .... 3.13 windscreen washer .... 1.112 – 1.113, 4.11 wiper blades .... 5.37 – 5.38 wipers blades .... 5.37 – 5.38

RENAULT S.A.S. SOCIETÉ PAR ACTIONS SIMPLIFIÉE AU CAPITAL DE 533 941 113 € / 13-15, QUAI LE GALLO 92100 BOULOGNE-BILLANCOURT R.C.S. NANTERRE 780 129 987 — SIRET 780 129 987 03591 / TÉL.: [phone] NU 1183-8 - 99 91 085 715 - 11/2019 — Edition anglaise

KF